SERVICE MANUAL US Model Canadian Model CD/DVD PLAYER SPECIFICATIONS DVP-NS700P RMT-D129A System Laser Semiconductor laser Signal format system NTSC Audio characteristics Frequency response DVD (PCM 96 kHz): 2 Hz to 44 kHz (±1.0 dB) DVD (PCM 48 kHz): 2 Hz to 22 kHz (±0.5 dB) CD: 2 Hz to 20 kHz (±0.5 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio (S/N ratio) 115 dB (LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks only) Harmonic distortion 0.003 % Dynamic range DVD: 103 dB CD: 99 dB Wow and flutter Less than detected value (±0.001% W PEAK) The signals from LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks are measured. When you play PCM sound tracks with a 96 kHz sampling frequency, the output signals from the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL and OPTICAL) jacks are converted to 48 kHz sampling frequency. Outputs General Power requirements 120V AC, 60 Hz Power consumption 15 W Dimensions (approx.) 430 × 74 × 256 mm (17 × 3 × 101/8 in.) (w/h/d) incl. projecting parts Mass (approx.) 2.7 kg (5 lb) Operating temperature 5 °C to 35 °C (41 °F to 95 °F) Operating humidity 25 % to 80 % Supplied accessories Specifications and design are subject to change without notice. ENERGY STARR is a U.S. registered mark. As an ENERGY STARR Partner, Sony Corporation has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STARR guidelines for energy efficiency. Jack name Jack type Maximum output level Load impedance LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) (1/2) Phono jack 2 Vrms (at 50 kilohms) Over 10 kilohms DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL) Optical output jack -18 dBm Wave length: 660 nm DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) Phono jack 0.5 Vp-p 75 ohms terminated LINE OUT (VIDEO) (1/2) Phono jack 1.0 Vp-p 75 ohms, sync negative S VIDEO OUT (1/2) 4-pin mini DIN Luminance signal: 1.0 Vp-p Color signal: 0.286 Vp-p 75 ohms, sync negative 75 ohms terminated COMPONENT VIDEO OUT(Y, PB, PR) Phono jack Y: 1.0 Vp-p PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ohms, sync negative 75 ohms Check that you have the following items: • Audio/video cord (pinplug × 3 y pinplug × 3) (1) • Remote commander (remote) RMT-D129A (1) • Size AA (R6) batteries (2) • Component video cord (pinplug × 3 y pinplug × 3) (1) www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com – 2 – WARNING!! WHEN SERVICING, DO NOT APPROACH THE LASER EXIT WITH THE EYE TOO CLOSELY. IN CASE IT IS NECESSARY TO CONFIRM LASER BEAM EMISSION, BE SURE TO OBSERVE FROM A DISTANCE OF MORE THAN 25 cm FROM THE SURFACE OF THE OBJECTIVE LENS ON THE OPTICAL PICK-UP BLOCK. CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous ra- diation exposure. ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT À LA SÉCURITÉ! LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFIÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LES DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PIÈCES SONT CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE REMPLACER CES COM- POSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈCES SONY DONT LES NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU DANS LES SUPPLÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY. SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS PUB- LISHED BY SONY. CAUTION: The use of optical instrument with this product will increase eye hazard. Fig. A. Using an AC voltmeter to check AC leakage. 1.5 kΩ 0.15 µF AC voltmeter (0.75 V) To Exposed Metal Parts on Set Earth Ground LEAKAGE TEST The AC leakage from any exposed metal part to earth ground and from all exposed metal parts to any exposed metal part having a return to chassis, must not exceed 0.5 mA (500 microamperes). Leakage current can be measured by any one of three methods. 1. A commercial leakage tester, such as the Simpson 229 or RCA WT-540A. Follow the manufacturers' instructions to use these instruments. 2. A battery-operated AC milliammeter. The Data Precision 245 digital multimeter is suitable for this job. 3. Measuring the voltage drop across a resistor by means of a VOM or battery-operated AC voltmeter. The “limit” indica- tion is 0.75V, so analog meters must have an accurate low- voltage scale. The Simpson 250 and Sanwa SH-63Trd are ex- amples of a passive VOM that is suitable. Nearly all battery operated digital multimeters that have a 2V AC range are suit- able. (See Fig. A) 1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-sol- dered connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes and bridges. 2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are “pinched” or contact high-wattage resistors. 3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly transis- tors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement. 4. Look for parts which, though functioning, show obvious signs of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and recom- mend their replacement. 5. Check the line cord for cracks and abrasion. Recommend the replacement of any such line cord to the customer. 6. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified. 7. Check the antenna terminals, metal trim, “metallized” knobs, screws, and all other exposed metal parts for AC leakage. Check leakage as described below. SAFETY CHECK-OUT After correcting the original service problem, perform the following safety checks before releasing the set to the customer: www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com – 3 – TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Title Page Section Title Page Service Note ............................................................................ 4 1. GENERAL Getting Started .............................................................. 1-3 Hookups ........................................................................ 1-4 Playing Discs ................................................................. 1-6 Searching for a Scene................................................... 1-9 Viewing Information About the Disc .............................. 1-10 Sound Adjustments ....................................................... 1-11 Enjoying Movies ............................................................ 1-12 Using Various Additional Functions .............................. 1-14 Settings and Adjustments ............................................. 1-16 Additional Information ................................................... 1-18 2. DISASSEMBLY 2-1. Case Removal ............................................................... 2-1 2-2. AV-58 Board Removal ................................................... 2-1 2-3. MB-100 Board Removal ................................................ 2-1 2-4. Tray Cover Removal ...................................................... 2-1 2-5. Front Panel Removal ..................................................... 2-2 2-6. Power Block Removal ................................................... 2-2 2-7. RM-85 Board Removal .................................................. 2-2 2-8. Mechanism Deck Removal ........................................... 2-2 2-9. IF-83 Board Removal .................................................... 2-3 2-10. Tray Removal ................................................................. 2-3 2-11. Loading Motor (M001), MS-81 Board Removal ............ 2-3 2-12. Optical Pick-up Removal ............................................... 2-3 2-13. Internal Views ................................................................ 2-4 2-14. Circuit Boards Location ................................................. 2-5 3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS 3-1. Overall Block Diagram................................................... 3-1 3-2. RF/Servo Block Diagram ............................................... 3-3 3-3. Signal Processor Block Diagram .................................. 3-5 3-4. System Control Block Diagram ..................................... 3-7 3-5. Video Block Diagram ..................................................... 3-9 3-6. Audio Block Diagram ..................................................... 3-11 3-7. Interface Control Block Diagram ................................... 3-13 3-8. Power 1 Block Diagram ................................................. 3-15 3-9. Power 2 Block Diagram ................................................. 3-17 4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4-1. Frame Schematic Diagram............................................ 4-3 4-2. Printed Wiring Boards and Schematic Diagrams ......... 4-5 MS-81 (LOADING), RM-85 (REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER) Printed Wiring Board and Schematic Diagram ............. 4-5 MB-100 Printed Wiring Board ....................................... 4-7 MB-100 (RF AMP, SERVO) Schematic Diagram .......... 4-11 MB-100 (ARP, SERVO DSP) Schematic Diagram ........ 4-13 MB-100 (AV DECODER) Schematic Diagram .............. 4-15 MB-100 (BNR) Schematic Diagram .............................. 4-17 MB-100 (DRIVE) Schematic Diagram .......................... 4-19 MB-100 (SYSTEM CONTROL) Schematic Diagram ....................................................... 4-21 MB-100 (CLOCK GENERATOR) Schematic Diagram ....................................................... 4-23 MB-100 (AUDIO DSP, D/A CONVERTER) Schematic Diagram ....................................................... 4-25 MB-100 (GATE ARRAY) Schematic Diagram ............... 4-27 MB-100 (I/P CONVERTER) Schematic Diagram ......... 4-29 AV-58 Printed Wiring Board .......................................... 4-33 AV-58 (VIDEO BUFFER) Schematic Diagram .............. 4-35 AV-58 (AUDIO AMP) Schematic Diagram .................... 4-37 IF-83 Printed Wiring Board ........................................... 4-39 IF-83 (IF CON) Schematic Diagram ............................. 4-41 HS13S0U Printed Wiring Board .................................... 4-43 HS13S0U Schematic Diagram ...................................... 4-45 5. IC PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION 5-1. System Control Pin Function (MB-100 Board IC103) .................................................. 5-1 6. TEST MODE 6-1. General Description ...................................................... 6-1 6-2. Starting Test Mode ........................................................ 6-1 6-3. Syscon Diagnosis .......................................................... 6-1 6-4. Drive Auto Adjustment .................................................. 6-5 6-5. Drive Manual Operation ................................................ 6-7 6-6. Mecha Aging ................................................................. 6-10 6-7. Emergency History ........................................................ 6-10 6-8. Version Information ....................................................... 6-11 6-9. Video Level Adjustment ................................................ 6-11 6-10. IF CON Self Diagnostic Function .................................. 6-11 6-11. Troubleshooting ............................................................. 6-18 7. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT 7-1. Power Supply Check ..................................................... 7-1 1. HS13S0U Boards .......................................................... 7-1 7-2. Adjustment of Video System ......................................... 7-2 1. Video Level Adjustment ................................................ 7-2 2. Progressive Video Level Adjustment ............................ 7-2 3. Checking S Video Output S-Y ....................................... 7-2 4. Checking S Video Output S-C....................................... 7-2 5. Checking Component Video Output Y .......................... 7-3 6. Checking Component Video Output B-Y ...................... 7-3 7. Checking Component Video Output R-Y ...................... 7-3 7-3. Adjustment Related Parts Arrangement ....................... 7-4 8. REPAIR PARTS LIST 8-1. Exploded Views ............................................................. 8-1 8-1-1. Case Assembly ........................................................ 8-1 8-1-2. Chassis Assembly .................................................... 8-2 8-1-3. Mechanism Deck Assembly ..................................... 8-3 8-2. Electrical Parts List ....................................................... 8-4 www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com – 4 – SERVICE NOTE 1. DISASSEMBLY • This set can be disassembled in the order shown below. Set Case (Page 2-1) AV-58 Board (Page 2-1) MB-100 Board (Page 2-1) Tray (Page 2-3) Loading Motor (M001), MS-81 Board (Page 2-3) Optical Pick-up (Page 2-3) IF-83 Board (Page 2-3) Mechanism Deck (Page 2-2) Tray Cover (Page 2-1) Power Block (Page 2-2) RM-85 Board (Page 2-2) Front Panel (Page 2-2) www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com – 5 – 1) Remove the case from the set. (Refer to 2-1) 2) Remove the rear panel as shown in Fig. 2. Fig. 2 3) Remove the MB-100 board. (Refer to 2-3) 4) Set the rear panel as shown in Fig. 3. Fig. 3 2. DISC REMOVAL PROCEDURE (at POWER OFF) 1) Insert a tapering driver into the aperture of the unit bottom, and move the lever of chuck cam in the direction of the arrow A. (See Fig. 1) 2) Draw out the tray in the direction of the arrow B, and remove a disc. (See Fig. 1) Fig. 1 3. HOW TO SERVICE MB-100 BOARD • Jig (J-6090-107-A) Extension cable Tray Lever of chuck cam Aperture B A CK-105 board Stand (with CK-106 Board) Eight flexible flat cables FFC 5P, FFC 9P, FFC 15P, FFC26 P, FFC 9P (DVP-NS500P/NS700P), FFC 15P (DVP-NS400D), FFC 25P (EXCEPT DVP-NS300 J model), FFC 29P (DVP-NS300 J model) 2 Two connectors (CN101, 202) 1 Two flexible flat cables (FMAV-003: CN102/FMA-029: CN203) 6 Rear panel 3 Screw (B3) 4 Boss 5 Boss 5 Two connectors (CN101, 202) Rear panel 4 Screw (B3) 3 Boss 2 Boss 1 www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com – 6 – 5) Set the stand (with CK-106 board) as shown in Fig. 4. Fig. 4 6) Set the CK-105 board as shown in Fig. 5. Fig. 5 7) Set the four flexible flat cables as shown in Fig. 6. Fig. 6 1 MB-100 board 2 Stand (with CK-106 board) 3 Connector (CN101) 4 Two screws (B3) 4 Connector (CN109) 1 CK-105 board 3 Claw 2 4 Connector (FFC15P: CN110) 3 Flexible flat cable (FFC15P: CN201) 2 Three connectors (FFC26P: CN102/ FFC9P: CN104/ FFC5P: CN106) 1 Three flexible flat cables (FFC26P: CN201/ FFC9P: CN202/ FFC5P: CN402) 8) Set the MB-100 board as shown in Fig. 7, Fig. 8. Fig. 7 Fig. 8 2 Connector (FFC9P: CN902) 4 Connector (FFC25P: CN801) 1 Flexible flat cable (FFC9P: CN102) 3 Flexible flat cable (FFC25P: CN203) MB-100 board www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com – 7 – 5. CONNECTION OF SERVICE JIG CK-105 Mechanism deck IF-83 MB-100 AV-58 CK-106 (Stand) B to B Connector 15P B to B Connector 15P FFC26P (Used the set) FFC 9P (Used the set) FFC 5P (Used the set) FFC26P FFC 9P FFC 5P FFC15P FFC9P FFC25P CN101 CN102 CN103 CN104 CN105 CN106 CN201 CN202 CN402 CN109 CN403 CN110 CN201 CN202 CN101 CN801 CN203 CN902 CN102 www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 1-1 SECTION 1 GENERAL This section is extracted from instruction manual (3-068-059-11). DVP-NS700P 6 About this Manual • Instructions in this manual describe the controls on the remote. You can also use the controls on the player if they have the same or similar names as those on the remote. • The meaning of the icons used in this manual is described below: This Player Can Play the Following Discs The “DVD VIDEO” logo is a trademark. Your player has a region code printed on the back of the unit and will only play DVDs labeled with identical region codes. DVDs labeled will also play on this player. If you try to play any other DVD, the message “Playback prohibited by area limitations.” will appear on the TV screen. Depending on the DVD, no region code indication may be labeled even though playing the DVD is prohibited by area restrictions. The player cannot play the following discs: • CD-ROMs (PHOTO CDs included) • All CD-Rs other than music and VCD format CD-Rs • Data part of CD-Extras • DVD-ROMs • DVD Audio discs • HD layer on SACDs Also, the player cannot play the following discs: • A DVD with a different region code (page 79). • A disc recorded in a color system other than NTSC, such as PAL or SECAM (this player conforms to the NTSC color system). • A disc that has a non-standard shape (e.g., card, heart). • A disc with paper or stickers on it. • A disc that has the adhesive of cellophane tape or a sticker still left on it. Icon Meaning Icon Meaning Functions available in DVD video mode Functions available in music CD mode Functions available in VIDEO CD mode z More convenient features Format of discs DVD VIDEO VIDEO CD Music CD Region code Example of discs that the player cannot play ALL MODEL NO. DVP–XXXX CD/DVD PLAYER AC 00V 00Hz 00W NO. SONY CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN 0-000-000-00 X Region code 7 Note Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs cannot be played on this player depending upon the recording quality or physical condition of the disc, or the characteristics of the recording device. Furthermore, the disc will not play if it has not been correctly finalized. For more information, see the operating instructions for the recording device. Some playback operations of DVDs and VIDEO CDs may be intentionally set by software producers. Since this player plays DVDs and VIDEO CDs according to the disc contents the software producers designed, some playback features may not be available. Also, refer to the instructions supplied with the DVDs or VIDEO CDs. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents, other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation, and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Notes about the Discs On handling discs • To keep the disc clean, handle the disc by its edge. Do not touch the surface. • Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or heat sources such as hot air ducts, or leave it in a car parked in direct sunlight as the temperature may rise considerably inside the car. • After playing, store the disc in its case. On cleaning • Before playing, clean the disc with a cleaning cloth. Wipe the disc from the center out. • Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners, or anti-static spray intended for vinyl LPs. Note on playback operations of DVDs and VIDEO CDs Copyrights 8 Index to Parts and Controls For more information, refer to the pages indicated in parentheses. A POWER switch/indicator (29) 2 PROGRESSIVE indicator (70) 3 Disc tray (29) 4 A (open/close) button (29) 5 ./> (previous/next) buttons (30) 6 C/X/x/c/ ENTER buttons (25) 7 JOG button/indicator (40) 8 TITLE button (32) 9 DVD MENU button (32) q; O RETURN button (33) qa DISPLAY button (12) qs Click shuttle (40) qd x (stop) button (29) qf X (pause) button (30) qg H (play) button (29) qh Front panel display (9) qj SURROUND button/indicator (51) qk BNR (Block Noise Reduction) button/ indicator (55) ql (remote sensor) (15) Front Panel R POWER ON OFF SURROUND BNR PROGRESSIVE SCAN TITLE DVD MENU RETURN DISPLAY JOG PUSH ENTER 9 When playing back a DVD When playing back a VIDEO CD (PBC) When playing back a CD or VIDEO CD (without PBC) Front Panel Display DVD PGM SHUFFLE TITLE CHAP HOUR MIN SEC DTS ANGLE REPEAT1 A-B Digital Playing time (45) Disc type Playing status Current chapter (45) Current audio signal (50) Lights up when you can change the angle (53) Current play mode (34) Current title (45) VIDEO CD CD PBC MIN SEC A-B Playing status Current play mode (34) Disc type Current scene (45) Playing time (45) Lights up when playing back a VIDEO CD with PBC (33) VIDEO CD CD PGM SHUFFLE TRACK INDEX MIN SEC REPEAT1 A-B Playing time (45) Disc type Playing status Current track and index (45) Current play mode (34) continued www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 1-2 10 1 DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack (22) (23) (24) 2 DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL) jack (22) (23) (24) 3 LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks (16) (21) (22) (23) 4 LINE OUT (VIDEO) 1/2 jacks (16) (18) 5 S VIDEO OUT 1/2 jacks (18) 6 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks (18) 7 VIDEO OUT SCAN SELECT switch (70) Rear Panel COAXIAL OPTICAL R– AUDIO 1 – L VIDEO 1 1 2 R– AUDIO 2 – L VIDEO 2 PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL DIGITAL OUT Y SELECTABLE INTERLACE PROGRESSIVE PB PR LINE OUT OUT S VIDEO VIDEO OUT COMPONENT SCAN SELECT VIDEO OUT 11 A Z OPEN/CLOSE button (30) B Number buttons C CLEAR button (34) D ANGLE button (53) 5 AUDIO button (49) 6 PROGRAM button (34) 7 SHUFFLE button (36) H ./> PREV/NEXT buttons (30) I c / C SEARCH/STEP buttons (39) J H PLAY button (29) K TITLE button (32) L DISPLAY button (34) M TV/DVD switch (64) N [/1 (on/standby) button (29) O BNR (Block Noise Reduction) button (55) P TV/VIDEO button (64) Q VOL +/– buttons (64) R ENTER button S SUBTITLE button (54) T TIME/TEXT button (45) U REPEAT button (36) V INSTANT REPLAY button (30) W SURROUND button (51) X / y SCAN/SLOW buttons (39) Y X PAUSE button (30) Z x STOP button (29) wj DVD MENU button (32) wk C/X/x/c buttons (25) wl ENTER button (25) e; O RETURN button (33) Remote 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 y 12 Guide to the Control Menu Display Use the Control Menu to select a function that you would like to use. The Control Menu display appears when the DISPLAY button is pressed. For details, please refer to the page in parentheses. List of Control Menu Items Control Menu OFF 2: FRENCH 3: SPANISH 1: ENGLISH 1 8 ( 3 4 ) 1 2 ( 2 7 ) T 1 : 3 2 : 5 5 DVD Select: Cancel: SUBTITLE ENTER RETURN PLAY 1: ENGLISH Currently playing chapter number (Video CD: index number) Playing time Total number of chapters or indexes recorded Currently playing title number (Video CD/CD: track number) Options Current setting Total number of titles or tracks recorded Playback status (N Playback, X Pause, x Stop, etc.) Function name of selected Control Menu item Operation message Icon of selected Control Menu item Control Menu items Type of disc being played back TITLE (DVD only) (page 41)/ SCENE (only VIDEO CD in PBC playback) (page 41)/TRACK (VIDEO CD only) (page 41) Selects the title (DVD), the scene (VIDEO CD in PBC playback) or the track (VIDEO CD) to be played. CHAPTER (DVD only) (page 41)/INDEX (VIDEO CD only) (page 41) Selects the chapter (DVD) or the index (VIDEO CD) to be played. TRACK (CD only) (page 41) Selects the track (CD) to be played. INDEX (CD only) (page 41) Selects the index (CD) to be played. TIME/TEXT (page 41) Checks the elapsed time and the remaining playback time. Input the time code for picture and music searching. Displays the DVD or the CD text. AUDIO (page 49) Changes the audio setting. SUBTITLE (DVD only) (page 54) Displays the subtitles. Changes the subtitle language. ANGLE (DVD only) (page 53) Changes the angle. 13 TVS (TV Virtual Surround Sound) (page 51) Lets you enjoy surround sound effects by using sound imaging to create virtual rear speakers from the sound of your stereo TV’s internal speakers. ADVANCED (DVD only) (page 48) Checks the information (bit rate or layer) on the disc while playing a DVD. CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL (page 59) Sets the disc to prohibit playing. SETUP (page 67) QUICK Setup (page 25) Use Quick Setup to choose the desired language of the on screen display, the shape of the TV screen, and the audio output. CUSTOM Setup In addition to the Quick Setup setting, you can adjust the image and sound quality, Parental Control, and other various settings. RESET Returns the settings in “SETUP” to the default setting. PROGRAM (page 34) Selects the title, the chapter, or the track to play a disc in the order you want. SHUFFLE (page 36) Plays the title, the chapter, or the track in random order. REPEAT (page 36) Plays the entire disc (all titles/all tracks) repeatedly or one title/chapter/track repeatedly. A-B REPEAT (page 37) Specifies the parts you want to play repeatedly. BNR (page 55) Adjusts the picture quality by reducing the “block noise” or mosaic like patterns that appear on your TV screen. VIDEO EQUALIZER (DVD/ VIDEO CD only) (page 56) Adjusts the video signal of the DVD or VIDEO CD from the player. You can adjust each element of the picture, such as the HUE and BRIGHTNESS. DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER (DVD/VIDEO CD only) (page 58) Exaggerates the outline of the image to produce a sharper picture. VIEWER (DVD/VIDEO CD only) (page 43) Divides the screen into 9 sub-screens to help you find the scene you want quickly. continued www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 1-3 14 z Each time you press DISPLAY, the Control Menu display changes as follows: You can display the Control Menu display 1 only during CD playback. The Control Menu items are different depending on the disc. z The Control Menu icon indicator lights up in green t when you select any item except “OFF.” (“TVS,” “PROGRAM,” “SHUFFLE,” “REPEAT,” “A-B REPEAT,” “BNR,” “DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER” only). The “ANGLE” indicator lights up in green only when the angles can be changed. The “VIDEO EQUALIZER” indicator lights up in green when any setting other than “STANDARD” is selected. Control Menu display 1 m Control Menu display 2 (The items except the first three items from the top are changed to other items.) m ADVANCED display (Appears if you select any setting other than “OFF.” See page 48.) m Control Menu display off , Getting Started 15 Getting Started Quick Overview A quick overview presented in this chapter will give you enough information to start using the player for your enjoyment. To use the surround sound features of this player, refer to “Hookups” on page 18. Note You cannot connect this player to a TV that does not have a video input jack. Be sure to turn off the power of each component before connecting. Step 1: Unpacking Check that you have the following items: • Audio/video cord (pinplug × 3 y pinplug × 3) (1) • Remote commander (remote) RMT-D129A (1) • Size AA (R6) batteries (2) • Component video cord (pinplug × 3 y pinplug × 3) (1) Step 2: Inserting Batteries into the Remote You can control the player using the supplied remote. Insert two size AA (R6) batteries by matching the 3 and # ends on the batteries to the markings inside the compartment. When using the remote, point it at the remote sensor on the player. Notes • Do not leave the remote in an extremely hot or humid place. • Do not drop any foreign object into the remote casing, particularly when replacing the batteries. • Do not expose the remote sensor to direct light from the sun or a lighting apparatus. Doing so may cause a malfunction. • If you do not use the remote for an extended period of time, remove the batteries to avoid possible damage from battery leakage and corrosion. 16 Step 3: TV Hookups Connect the supplied audio/video cord and power cord in the order (1~3) shown below. Be sure to connect the power cord last. When connecting to a wide screen TV Depending on the disc, the image may not fit your TV screen. If you want to change the aspect ratio, please refer to page 69. When connecting to a TV that accepts progressive (480p) format signals You need to use the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks to view progressive signals. Hook up your TV using pattern C on page 18, and then run Quick Setup on page 25. COAXIAL OPTICAL R– AUDIO 1 – L VIDEO 1 1 2 R– AUDIO 2 – L VIDEO 2 PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL DIGITAL OUT Y SELECTABLE INTERLACE PROGRESSIVE PB PR LINE OUT OUT S VIDEO VIDEO OUT COMPONENT SCAN SELECT VIDEO OUT VIDEO AUDIO INPUT L R (yellow) (white) (red) R– AUDIO 2 – L VIDEO 2 LINE OUT R– AUDIO 1 – L VIDEO 1 3 Power source CD/DVD Player TV 2 Power source l: Signal flow to video input to LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1 1 Audio/video cord (supplied) to audio input to LINE OUT (VIDEO) 1 17 Getting Started Step 4: Playing a Disc 1 Turn on the TV. 2 Switch the input selector on the TV to the player. 3 Press POWER on the player. 4 Press A on the player to open the disc tray. 5 Place the disc on the tray with the playback side facing down. 6 Press H. The disc tray closes and the player begins playing the disc. After Step 6 Depending on the disc, a menu may be displayed on the TV screen. If so, select the item you want from the menu and play the DVD (page 32) or VIDEO CD disc (page 33). To stop playing Press x. To take out the disc Press A. To turn off the player Press [/1 on the remote. The player is set to standby mode and the power indicator lights up in red. Press POWER on the player to turn off completely. With the playback side facing down www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 1-4 18 Hookups Hooking Up the Player Follow Steps 1 to 4 to hook up and adjust the settings of the player. Before you start, turn off the power, check that you have all of the supplied accessories, and insert the batteries into the remote (page 15). Notes • Plug cords securely to prevent unwanted noise. • Refer to the instructions supplied with the components to be connected. Step 1: Connecting the Video Cords Connect this player to your TV monitor, projector, or AV amplifier (receiver) using a video cord. Select one of the patterns A through C, according to the input jack on your TV monitor, projector, or AV amplifier (receiver). In order to view progressive signal (480p) pictures with a compatible TV, projector, or monitor, you must use connection C. COAXIAL OPTICAL R– AUDIO 1 – L VIDEO 1 1 2 R– AUDIO 2 – L VIDEO 2 PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL DIGITAL OUT Y SELECTABLE INTERLACE PROGRESSIVE PB PR LINE OUT OUT S VIDEO VIDEO OUT COMPONENT SCAN SELECT VIDEO OUT PR PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO IN C AUDIO VIDEO INPUT L R A INPUT S VIDEO B CD/DVD player TV, projector, or AV amplifier (receiver) l : Signal flow Audio/video cord (supplied) (yellow) (yellow) Component video cord (supplied) S VIDEO cord (not supplied) TV, projector, or AV amplifier (receiver) TV, projector, or AV amplifier (receiver) (green) (blue) (red) (green) (blue) (red) Hookups 19 Connect the yellow plug of the audio/video cord (supplied) to the yellow (video) jacks. You will enjoy standard quality images. Use the red and white plugs to connect to the audio input jacks (page 21). Connect the S VIDEO cord (not supplied). You will enjoy standard quality images. Connect the component via the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks using the component video cord (supplied) or three video cords (not supplied) of the same kind and length. You will enjoy accurate color reproduction and high quality images. If your TV accepts progressive (480p) format signals, you must use this connection and set “COMPONENT OUT” to “PROGRESSIVE” in “SCREEN SETUP” (page 69). Notes • Do not connect the player to a VCR if you pass the player signals via the VCR. You may not receive a clear image on the TV screen. • Consumers should note that not all high definition television sets are fully compatible with this product and may cause artifacts to be displayed in the picture. In the case of 480 progressive scan picture problems, it is recommended that the user switch the connection to the standard definition output. If there are questions regarding your Sony TV set’s compatibility with this model 480p DVD player, please contact our customer service center. A If you are connecting to a video input jack B If you are connecting to an S VIDEO input jack C If you are connecting to a monitor, projector, or AV amplifier (receiver) having component video input jacks (Y, PB, PR) Yellow (Video) White (L) Red (R) Yellow (Video) White (L) Red (R) Green Blue Red Green Blue Red VCR CD/DVD player TV Connect directly 20 Step 2: Connecting the Audio Cords Refer to the chart below to select the connection that best suits your system. The surround effects you will enjoy depend on the connections and components you use. Select one of the following connections, through . * Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby,” “Pro Logic,” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works. © 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. ** “DTS” is a registered trademark of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Select a connection Connection Components to be connected (page 21) • TV (stereo) (page 22) • Stereo amplifier (receiver) (having L and R audio input jacks only, or having a digital input jack) • 2 speakers (front L and R) (page 22) • MD deck/DAT deck (page 23) • AV amplifier (receiver) with a Dolby* Surround (Pro Logic) decoder (having L and R audio input jacks only, or having a digital input jack) • 3 speakers (front L and R, and rear (monaural)) • 6 speakers (front L and R, center, rear L and R, and subwoofer) (page 24) • AV amplifier (receiver) having a Dolby Digital or DTS** decoder and a digital input jack • 6 speakers (front L and R, rear L and R, center, and subwoofer) A D A B B C D Hookups 21 This connection will use your TV speakers for sound. xRecommended surround sound effects for this connection •TVS DYNAMIC (page 51) •TVS WIDE (page 51) The yellow plug is used for video signals (page 18). Connecting to your TV A COAXIAL OPTICAL R– AUDIO 1 – L VIDEO 1 1 2 R– AUDIO 2 – L VIDEO 2 PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL DIGITAL OUT Y SELECTABLE INTERLACE PROGRESSIVE PB PR LINE OUT OUT S VIDEO VIDEO OUT COMPONENT SCAN SELECT VIDEO OUT A R– AUDIO 1 – L VIDEO 1 R– AUDIO 2 – L VIDEO 2 LINE OUT TV l : Signal flow CD/DVD player Audio/video cord (supplied) (white) (red) (yellow) to audio input (white) (red) (yellow) continued www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 1-5 22 This connection will use your 2 front speakers connected to your stereo amplifier (receiver) for sound. If the stereo amplifier (receiver) has audio input jacks L and R only, use . If the amplifier (receiver) has a digital input jack, use . When connecting to an MD deck or a DAT deck, use . In this case, you can also connect the player directly to the MD deck or DAT deck without using your stereo amplifier (receiver). xRecommended surround sound effects for the connection only •TVS STANDARD (page 51) z In connection , you can use the supplied audio/video cord instead of using a separate audio cord. z To realize better surround sound effects, make sure that your listening position is in between your speakers. Note If you select one of the TVS effects while playing a disc, no sound will come from your speakers with the connection. Connecting to a stereo amplifier (receiver) and 2 speakers/Connecting to an MD deck or DAT deck B B-1 B-2 B-2 B-1 B-1 B-2 COAXIAL OPTICAL R– AUDIO 1 – L VIDEO 1 1 2 R– AUDIO 2 – L VIDEO 2 PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL DIGITAL OUT Y SELECTABLE INTERLACE PROGRESSIVE PB PR LINE OUT OUT S VIDEO VIDEO OUT COMPONENT SCAN SELECT VIDEO OUT B-2 B-1 VIDEO 1 R– AUDIO 2 – L VIDEO 2 LINE OUT R– AUDIO 1 – L COAXIAL OPTICAL PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL DIGITAL OUT l: Signal flow CD/DVD player or Stereo amplifier (receiver) MD deck/DAT deck Front (L) Front (R) [Speakers] (white) (red) (white) (red) Coaxial digital cord (not supplied) Stereo audio cord (not supplied) Optical digital cord (not supplied) Remove jack cap before connecting or to coaxial or optical digital input to audio input Hookups 23 This connection will allow you to enjoy the surround effects of the Pro Logic decoder on your amplifier (receiver). If you have an AV amplifier (receiver) equipped with a Dolby Digital, or DTS decoder, refer to page 24. You can enjoy the Dolby Surround effects only when playing Dolby Surround audio or multi- channel audio (Dolby Digital) discs. Pro Logic uses a minimum of 3 speakers (front L and R, and rear (monaural)). The surround effects are enhanced if 6 speakers (front L and R, center, rear L and R, and subwoofer) are used. If your amplifier (receiver) has R and L audio input jacks only, use . If your amplifier (receiver) has a digital input jack, use . xRecommended surround sound effects using this connection with your amplifier (receiver) •Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) (page 79) z For correct speaker setting location, please refer to the operating instructions of the amplifier (receiver). ∗ When connecting 6 speakers, replace the monaural rear speaker with a center speaker, 2 rear speakers and a subwoofer. Connecting to a Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) decoder amplifier (receiver) and 3 to 6 speakers C C-1 C-2 COAXIAL OPTICAL R– AUDIO 1 – L VIDEO 1 1 2 R– AUDIO 2 – L VIDEO 2 PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL DIGITAL OUT Y SELECTABLE INTERLACE PROGRESSIVE PB PR LINE OUT OUT S VIDEO VIDEO OUT COMPONENT SCAN SELECT VIDEO OUT VIDEO 1 R– AUDIO 2 – L VIDEO 2 LINE OUT R– AUDIO 1 – L COAXIAL OPTICAL PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL DIGITAL OUT C-2 C-1 CD/DVD player Front (R) Front (L) Rear (R) Subwoofer l: Signal flow Dolby Surround amplifier (receiver) center Rear* (mono) [Speakers] or Coaxial digital cord (not supplied) Stereo audio cord (not supplied) Optical digital cord (not supplied) Remove jack cap before connecting or to coaxial or optical digital input to audio input (red) (white) Rear (L) [Speakers] (white) (red) continued 24 This connection will allow you to use the Dolby Digital, or DTS decoder function of your AV amplifier (receiver). You are not able to enjoy the TVS sound effects of the player. xRecommended surround sound effects using this connection with your amplifier (receiver) •Dolby Digital (5.1ch) (page 79) •DTS (5.1ch) (page 79) z To enhance the surround sound effects, refer to the operating instructions of the amplifier (receiver) for correct speaker setting location. Note After you have completed the connection, be sure to set “DOLBY DIGITAL” to “DOLBY DIGITAL”(page 25). If your AV amplifier (receiver) has a DTS decoder, set “DTS” to “ON” (page 25). Otherwise, no sound or a loud noise will come from the speakers. Connecting to an AV amplifier (receiver) with a digital input jack having a Dolby Digital, or DTS decoder, and 6 speakers D COAXIAL OPTICAL R– AUDIO 1 – L VIDEO 1 1 2 R– AUDIO 2 – L VIDEO 2 PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL DIGITAL OUT Y SELECTABLE INTERLACE PROGRESSIVE PB PR LINE OUT OUT S VIDEO VIDEO OUT COMPONENT SCAN SELECT VIDEO OUT D COAXIAL OPTICAL PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL DIGITAL OUT Front (R) Rear (R) AV amplifier (receiver) with a decoder Subwoofer Center [Speakers] [Speakers] CD/DVD player or l: Signal flow Coaxial digital cord (not supplied) to optical digital input to coaxial digital input Optical digital cord (not supplied) Remove jack cap before connecting Front (L) Rear (L) Hookups 25 Step 3: Connecting the Power Cord Plug the player and TV power cords into an AC outlet. Do not connect the power cord of your player to the “switched” power socket of an amplifier (receiver). When you turn off the power of your amplifier (receiver), the menu setting for the player such as Playback Memory may be lost. Step 4: Quick Setup Follow the steps below to make the minimum number of basic adjustments for using the player. To skip an adjustment, press >. To return to the previous adjustment, press .. 1 Turn on the TV. 2 Switch the input selector on the TV to the player. 3 Press POWER on the player and press [/1 on the remote. “Press [ENTER] to run QUICK SETUP” appears at the bottom of the screen. If this message does not appear, select “QUICK” under “SETUP” in the Control Menu to run Quick Setup (page 67). 4 Press ENTER without inserting a disc. The Setup Display for selecting the language used in the on-screen display appears. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ./> X/x POWER ./> X/x ENTER ENTER [/1 LANGUAGE SETUP OSD: DVD MENU: AUDIO: SUBTITLE: FRENCH ENGLISH ENGLISH SPANISH PORTUGUESE continued www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 1-6 26 5 Press X/x to select a language. The player uses the language selected here to display the DVD menu and subtitles as well. 6 Press ENTER. The Setup Display for selecting the aspect ratio of the TV to be connected appears. 7 Press X/x to select the item. 8 Press ENTER. The Setup Display for selecting the type of video signal appears. 9 Press X/x to select the item. Select PROGRESSIVE only if you have made video connection C (page 18) and wish to view progressive video signals. q; Press ENTER. The Setup Display for selecting the type of jack used to connect your amplifier (receiver) appears. TV Type You select Page 4:3 standard TV 4:3 LETTER BOX or 4:3 PAN SCAN 69 A wide-screen TV or 4:3 standard TV with a wide-screen mode 16:9 69 TV Type You select Page Interlace format TV (standard TV) INTERLACE 70 Progressive format TV PROGRESSIVE 70 SCREEN SETUP TV TYPE: SCREEN SAVER: BACKGROUND: COMPONENT OUT: 16:9 4:3 LETTER BOX 4:3 PAN SCAN MODE: AUTO 4:3 LETTER BOX SCREEN SETUP TV TYPE: SCREEN SAVER: BACKGROUND: 4:3 LETTER BOX ON JACKET PICTURE COMPONENT OUT: INTERLACE MODE: INTERLACE PROGRESSIVE YES NO Is this player connected to an amplifier (receiver) ? Select the type of jack you are using. LINE OUTPUT L/R (AUDIO) DIGITAL OUTPUT Hookups 27 qa Press X/x to select the item, then press ENTER. • When “NO” or “LINE OUTPUT L/R (AUDIO)” is selected, Quick Setup is finished and connections are complete. • When “DIGITAL OUTPUT” is selected, the Setup Display for “DOLBY DIGITAL” appears. Proceed to Step qs. qs Press X/x to select the item. Choose the item that matches the audio connection you selected in page 22 to 24 ( through ). qd Press ENTER. DTS is selected. qf Press X/x to select the item. Choose the item that matches the audio connection you selected in page 22 to 24 ( through ). qg Press ENTER. Quick Setup is finished. All connections and setup operations are complete. Note You can directly start Quick Setup only when you run it for the first time. To run Quick Setup a second time, select “QUICK” under “SETUP” in the Control Menu (page 67). Audio Cord Connection Type You select Page D-PCM 75 DOLBY DIGITAL (only if the amplifier/receiver has a Dolby Digital decoder) 75 Audio Cord Connection Type You select Page OFF 75 ON (only if the amplifier/receiver has a DTS decoder) 75 B D AUDIO SETUP AUDIO ATT: AUDIO DRC: DIGITAL OUT: DOLBY DIGITAL: DTS: OFF STANDARD ON DOWNMIX: DOLBY SURROUND DOLBY DIGITAL D-PCM D-PCM B-2 C-2 D AUDIO SETUP AUDIO ATT: AUDIO DRC: DIGITAL OUT: DOLBY DIGITAL: DTS: OFF STANDARD ON DOWNMIX: DOLBY SURROUND D-PCM OFF OFF ON B D B-2 C-2 D continued 28 To enjoy the surround sound effects of this player or your amplifier (receiver), the following items must be set as described below for the audio connection you selected in page 20 to 24 ( through ). Each of these are the default settings and do not need to be adjusted when you first connect the player. Refer to page 67 for using the Setup Display. Audio Connection (page 20 to 24) No additional settings are needed. • If the sound distorts even when the volume is turned down, set “AUDIO ATT” to “ON” (page 74). Enjoying the surround sound effects Item You select Page DOWNMIX DOLBY SURROUND 74 Item You select Page DOWNMIX DOLBY SURROUND 74 DIGITAL OUT ON 75 B D A B-1 C-1 B-2 C-2 D Playing Discs 29 Playing Discs Playing Discs Depending on the DVD or VIDEO CD, some operations may be different or restricted. Refer to the operating instructions supplied with your disc. 1 Turn on your TV. 2 Switch the input selector on the TV to the player. When using an amplifier (receiver) Turn on the amplifier (receiver) and select the appropriate channel. 3 Press POWER on the player. The player enters standby mode and the power indicator lights up in red. 4 Press A on the player, and place a disc on the disc tray. The player automatically turns on and the power indicator lights up in green. 5 Press H. The disc tray closes, and the player starts playback (continuous play). Adjust the volume on the TV or the amplifier (receiver). After following Step 5 Depending on the disc, a menu may appear on the TV screen. You can play the disc interactively by following the instructions on the menu. DVD (page 32), VIDEO CD (page 33). To turn on the player Press POWER on the player. The player enters standby mode and the power indicator lights up in red. Press [/1 on the remote. The player turns on and the power indicator lights up in green. In standby mode, the player also turns on by pressing A on the player or by pressing H. To turn off the player Press [/1 on the remote. The player enters standby mode and the power indicator lights up in red. To turn off the player completely, press POWER on the player. While playing a disc, do not turn off the player by pressing POWER. Doing so may cancel the menu settings. When you turn off the player, first press x to stop playback and then press [/1 on the remote. POWER A H 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Power indicator [/1 H x AUDIO x With the playback side facing down continued www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 1-7 30 Notes on playing DTS sound tracks on a CD • When playing DTS-encoded CDs, excessive noise will be heard from the analog stereo jacks. To avoid possible damage to the audio system, the consumer should take proper precautions when the analog stereo jacks of the player are connected to an amplification system. To enjoy DTS Digital Surround™ playback, an external 5.1-channel decoder system must be connected to the digital jacks of the player. • Set the sound to “STEREO” using the AUDIO button when you play DTS sound tracks on a CD (page 49). • Do not play DTS sound tracks without first connecting the player to an audio component having a built-in DTS decoder. The player outputs the DTS signal via the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL and COAXIAL) jacks even if “DTS” in “AUDIO SETUP” is set to “OFF” in the Setup Display (page 75), and may affect your ears or cause your speakers to be damaged. Notes on playing DVDs with a DTS sound track • DTS audio signals are output only through the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL and COAXIAL) jacks. • If you connect the player to audio equipment without a DTS decoder, do not set “DTS” to “ON” in “AUDIO SETUP” (page 75). A loud noise may come out from the speakers, affecting your ears or causing the speakers to be damaged. • When you play a DVD with DTS sound tracks, set “DTS” to “ON” in “AUDIO SETUP” (page 75). z The Instant Replay function is useful when you want to review a scene or dialog that you missed. Note You may not be able to use the Instant Replay function with some scenes. Additional operations To Operation Stop Press x Pause Press X Resume play after pause Press X or H Go to the next chapter, track or scene in continuous play mode Press > Go back to the preceding chapter, track or scene in continuous play mode Press . Stop play and remove the disc Press Z Replay a previous scene (DVD only) Press INSTANT REPLAY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 H ./> Z X x INSTANT REPLAY Playing Discs 31 Resuming Playback from the Point Where You Stopped the Disc (Resume Play) When you stop the disc, the player remembers the point where you pressed x and “RESUME” appears on the front panel display. As long as you do not open the disc tray, Resume Play works even if the player enters standby mode by pressing [/1. 1 While playing a disc, press x to stop playback. “RESUME” appears on the front panel display and you can restart the disc from the point where you stopped the disc. If “RESUME” does not appear, Resume Play is not available. 2 Press H. The player starts playback from the point where you stopped the disc in Step 1. z To play from the beginning of the disc, press x twice, then press H. Notes • Depending on where you stopped the disc, the player may not resume playback from exactly the same point. • The point where you stopped playing is cleared when: —you turn the power off by pressing POWER on the player. —you change the play mode. —you change the settings on the Setup Display. x H 32 Using the DVD’s Menu Some discs have a “title menu” or a “DVD menu.” On some DVDs, this may simply be called a “menu” or “title.” A DVD is divided into long sections of a picture or a music feature called “titles.” When you play a DVD which contains several titles, you can select the title you want using the title menu. 1 Press TITLE. The title menu appears on the TV screen. The contents of the menu vary from disc to disc. 2 Press C/X/x/c or the number buttons to select the title you want to play. 3 Press ENTER. The player starts playing the selected title. z You can also display the title menu by pressing TITLE on the player. Some DVDs allow you to select the disc contents using a menu. When you play these DVDs, you can select items such as the language for the subtitles and the language for the sound using the DVD menu. 1 Press DVD MENU. The DVD menu appears on the TV screen. The contents of the menu vary from disc to disc. 2 Press C/X/x/c or the number buttons to select the item you want to change. 3 To change other items, repeat Step 2. 4 Press ENTER. z You can also display the DVD menu by pressing DVD MENU on the player. Using the title menu 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 TITLE ENTER C/X/x/c Number buttons Using the DVD menu DVD MENU ENTER C/X/x/c 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Number buttons Playing Discs 33 Playing VIDEO CDs with PBC Functions (PBC Playback) With PBC (Playback Control) functions, you can enjoy simple interactive operations, search functions, and other such operations. PBC playback allows you to play VIDEO CDs interactively by following the menu on the TV screen. 1 Start playing a VIDEO CD with PBC functions. The menu for your selection appears. 2 Select the item number you want by pressing X/x or the number buttons. 3 Press ENTER. 4 Follow the instructions in the menu for interactive operations. Refer to the instructions supplied with the disc, as the operating procedure may differ according to the VIDEO CD. To go back to the menu Press O RETURN. z To play without using PBC, press ./> or the number buttons while the player is stopped to select a track, then press H or ENTER. “Play without PBC” appears on the TV screen and the player starts continuous play. You cannot play still pictures such as a menu. To return to PBC playback, press x twice then press H. Note Depending on the VIDEO CD, “Press ENTER” in Step 3 may appear as “Press SELECT” in the instructions supplied with the disc. In this case, press H. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ./> H ORETURN X/x x ENTER Number buttons www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 1-8 34 Various Play Mode Functions (Program Play, Shuffle Play, Repeat Play, A-B Repeat Play) You can set the following play modes: • Program Play (page 34) • Shuffle Play (page 36) • Repeat Play (page 36) • A- B Repeat Play (page 37) Notes • The play mode is canceled when: —you open the disc tray. —the player enters standby mode by pressing [/1 on the remote. —you turn the power off by pressing POWER on the player. • If you are playing a VIDEO CD with PBC, you must first cancel PBC playback before you can set a play mode (except when you want to set A-B Repeat Play for moving pictures). You can play the contents of a disc in the order you want by arranging the order of the titles, chapters, or tracks on the disc to create your own program. You can program up to 99 titles, chapters, and tracks. 1 Press DISPLAY twice (when playing a CD, press once). The Control Menu appears. 2 Press X/x to select (PROGRAM), then press ENTER. The options for PROGRAM appear. 3 Press X/x to select “SET t,” then press ENTER. The display for programming appears. 4 Press c. The cursor moves to the title or track (in this case, “01”). Creating your own program (Program Play) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 H X/x/c DISPLAY PROGRAM CLEAR ENTER Number buttons SHUFFLE REPEAT OFF OFF SET ON 1 8 ( 3 4 ) 1 2 ( 2 7 ) T 1 : 3 2 : 5 5 DVD PLAY PROGRAM 1. TITLE ALL CLEAR 2. TITLE – – 3. TITLE – – 4. TITLE – – 5. TITLE – – 6. TITLE – – 7. TITLE – – T – – 01 02 03 04 05 “TRACK” is displayed when you play a VIDEO CD or a CD. Titles or tracks recorded on a disc PROGRAM 1. TITLE – – ALL CLEAR 2. TITLE – – 3. TITLE – – 4. TITLE – – 5. TITLE – – 6. TITLE – – 7. TITLE – – T C ALL 01 02 03 04 05 06 – – 01 02 03 04 05 Chapters recorded on a disc Playing Discs 35 5 Select the title, chapter, or track you want to program. xWhen playing a DVD For example, select chapter “03” of title “02.” Press X/x or the number buttons to select “02” under “T,” then press ENTER. Next, press X/x or the number buttons to select “03” under “C,” then press ENTER. xWhen playing a VIDEO CD or CD For example, select track “02.” Press X/x or the number buttons to select “02” under “T,” then press ENTER. 6 To program other titles, chapters, or tracks, repeat Steps 4 to 5. The programmed titles, chapters, and tracks are displayed in the selected order. 7 Press H to start Program Play. Program Play begins. When the program ends, you can restart the same program again by pressing H. To return to normal play Press CLEAR, or select “OFF” in Step 3. To play the same program again, select “ON” in Step 3 and press H. To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. To change the program 1 In Step 4, select the program number of the title, chapter, or track you want to change using X/x or the number buttons, and press c. 2 Follow Step 5 for new programming. To cancel the programmed order To cancel all the titles, chapters, or tracks in the programmed order, press X, and select “ALL CLEAR” in Step 4. To cancel the selected program, select the program using X/x in Step 4, then press CLEAR, or select “--” in Step 5, then press ENTER. To cancel the program directly, select the program using the number buttons, followed by ENTER. z You can do Repeat Play or Shuffle Play of the programmed titles, chapters, or tracks. Press REPEAT or SHUFFLE on the remote, or set “REPEAT” or “SHUFFLE” to “ON” in the Control Menu display during Program Play. z You can select “PROGRAM” directly by pressing PROGRAM. Note The number of titles, chapters, or tracks displayed is the same as the number of titles, chapters, or tracks recorded on a disc. PROGRAM 1. TITLE – – ALL CLEAR 2. TITLE – – 3. TITLE – – 4. TITLE – – 5. TITLE – – 6. TITLE – – 7. TITLE – – C ALL 02 03 04 05 06 T – – 01 02 03 04 05 01 T – – 01 02 03 04 05 PROGRAM 1. TITLE 0 2 – 0 3 ALL CLEAR 2. TITLE – – 3. TITLE – – 4. TITLE – – 5. TITLE – – 6. TITLE – – 7. TITLE – – Selected title and chapter PROGRAM 1. TRACK 0 2 ALL CLEAR 2. TRACK – – 3. TRACK – – 4. TRACK – – 5. TRACK – – 6. TRACK – – 7. TRACK – – 0:15:30 – – 01 02 03 04 05 T Selected track Total time of the programmed tracks continued 36 You can have the player “shuffle” titles, chapters, or tracks and play them in a random order. Subsequent “shuffling” may produce a different playing order. 1 Press DISPLAY twice during playback (when playing a CD, press once). The Control Menu appears. 2 Press X/x to select (SHUFFLE), then press ENTER. The options for SHUFFLE appear. 3 Press X/x to select the item. xWhen playing a DVD (Program Play is set to OFF) • TITLE: shuffles titles and plays them in a random order. • CHAPTER: shuffles chapters and plays them in a random order. xWhen playing a VIDEO CD or CD (Program Play is set to OFF) • TRACK: shuffles tracks and plays them in a random order. xWhen playing a VIDEO CD, CD, or DVD (Program Play is set to ON) • ON: shuffles titles or tracks selected in Program Play and plays them in a random order. 4 Press ENTER. Shuffle Play starts. To return to normal play Press CLEAR or select “OFF” in Step 3. To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. z You can set Shuffle Play while the player is stopped. After selecting the “SHUFFLE” option, press H. Shuffle Play starts. z You can select SHUFFLE directly by pressing SHUFFLE. Note Up to 200 chapters in a disc can be played in random order when “CHAPTER” is selected. You can play all of the titles or tracks on a disc, or a single title, chapter, or track repeatedly. You can use a combination of Shuffle or Program Play modes. Playing in random order (Shuffle Play) 7 8 0 9 DISPLAY H X/x ENTER SHUFFLE CLEAR 1 8 ( 3 4 ) 1 2 ( 2 7 ) T 1 : 3 2 : 5 5 OFF CHAPTER TITLE DVD PLAY OFF Playing repeatedly (Repeat Play) 4 5 6 7 8 0 9 H ENTER X/x DISPLAY REPEAT CLEAR Playing Discs 37 1 Press DISPLAY twice during playback (when playing a CD, press once). The Control Menu appears. 2 Select (REPEAT) using X/x, then press ENTER. The options for REPEAT appear. 3 Press X/x to select the item. xWhen playing a DVD (Program Play and Shuffle Play are set to OFF) • DISC: repeats all of the titles. • TITLE: repeats the current title on a disc. • CHAPTER: repeats the current chapter. xWhen playing a VIDEO CD or CD (Program Play and Shuffle Play are set to OFF) • DISC: repeats all of the tracks on a disc. • TRACK: repeats the current track. xWhen Program Play or Shuffle Play is on • ON: repeats Program Play or Shuffle Play. 4 Press ENTER. Repeat Play starts. To return to normal play Press CLEAR, or select “OFF” in Step 3. To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. z You can set Repeat Play while the player is stopped. After selecting the “REPEAT” option, press H. Repeat Play starts. z You can select “REPEAT” directly by pressing REPEAT. You can play a specific portion of a title, chapter, or track repeatedly. (This function is useful when you want to memorize lyrics, etc.) 1 Press DISPLAY twice during playback (when playing CD, press once). The Control Menu appears. 2 Press X/x to select (A-B REPEAT), then press ENTER. The options for A-B REPEAT appear. 1 8 ( 3 4 ) 1 2 ( 2 7 ) T 1 : 3 2 : 5 5 CHAPTER DISC OFF TITLE OFF DVD PLAY Repeating a specific portion (A-B Repeat Play) 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ENTER X/x DISPLAY CLEAR SET OFF OFF 1 8 ( 3 4 ) 1 2 ( 2 7 ) T 1 : 3 2 : 5 5 DVD PLAY continued www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 1-9 38 3 Press X/x to select “SET t,” then press ENTER. The A-B REPEAT setting display appears. 4 During playback, when you find the starting point (point A) of the portion to be played repeatedly, press ENTER. The starting point (point A) is set. 5 When you reach the ending point (point B), press ENTER again. The set points are displayed and the player starts repeating this specific portion. “A-B” appears in the front panel display during A-B Repeat Play. To return to normal play Press CLEAR, or select “OFF” in Step 3. To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. Notes • You can set A-B Repeat Play for only one specific section. • When you set A-B Repeat Play, the settings for Shuffle Play, Repeat Play, and Program Play are canceled. Set point A with . A-B REPEAT ENTER A: 18 – 1 : 32 : 55 CHAPTER TIME Set point B with . ENTER A-B REPEAT 1 8 ( 3 4 ) 1 2 ( 2 7 ) T 1 : 34 : 30 DVD A: 18 – 1 : 32 : 55 B: 18 – 1 : 34 : 30 CHAPTER TIME ON PLAY Searching for a Scene 39 Searching for a Scene Searching for a Particular Point on a Disc (Search, Scan, Slow-Motion Play, Freeze Frame) You can quickly locate a particular point on a disc by monitoring the picture or playing back slowly. Note Depending on the DVD/VIDEO CD, you may not be able to do some of the operations described. During playback, keep pressing C to locate a point in playback direction at the FF1M* speed or keep pressing c to locate a point in opposite direction at the FR1m* speed. When you find the point you want, release the button to return to normal playback speed. ∗ The FF1M/FR1m playback speed is the same as the scan speed and click shuttle speed described below. Press or y while playing a disc. When you find the point you want, press H to return to normal speed. Each time you press or y during scan the playback speed changes. Three speeds are available. With each press the indication changes as follows: Playback direction Opposite direction The ×2B/×2b playback speed is about twice the normal speed. The FF2M/FR2m playback speed is faster than FF1M/FR1m. You can use this function only for DVDs or VIDEO CDs. Press or y when the player is in the pause mode. To return to the normal speed, press H. Each time you press the or y button during Slow-motion play, the playback speed changes. Two speeds are available. With each press the indication changes as follows: Playback direction SLOW 2y y SLOW 1y Opposite direction (DVD only) SLOW 2 y SLOW 1 The SLOW2y/SLOW2 playback speed is slower than SLOW1y/SLOW1 . Locating a point quickly (Search) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 / y y H c / C Locating a point quickly by playing a disc in fast forward or fast reverse (Scan) Watching frame by frame (Slow- motion play) y y ×2B (DVD/CD only) t FF1M t FF2M ×2b (DVD only) t FR1m t FR2m y y y y y y continued 40 You can use this function only for DVDs or VIDEO CDs. When the player is in the pause mode, press C to go to the next frame. Press c to go to the preceding frame (DVD only). If you hold the button down, you can view the frames in succession. To return to normal playback, press H. Turn the click shuttle on the player. The playback speed changes depending on the turning direction and degree of rotation as follows: During playback FF2M Fast forward (faster than “FF1M”) Y FF1M Fast forward Y ×2B (DVD/CD only) Y PLAYN (normal speed) Y ×2b (DVD/CD only) Y FR1m Fast rewind Y FR2m Fast rewind (faster than “FF1m”) If you turn the click shuttle quickly, the playback speed goes to FF2M or FR2m at once. During pause mode (DVD only) SLOW1y Slow (playback direction) Y SLOW2y Slow (playback direction – slower than “SLOW1y”) Y PAUSEX Pause Y SLOW2 Slow (opposite direction – slower than “SLOW1 ”) Y SLOW1 Slow (opposite direction) During pause mode (VIDEO CD only) SLOW1y Slow (playback direction) Y SLOW2y Slow (playback direction – slower than “SLOW1y”) Y PAUSEX Pause To return to continuous play Press H. Playing one frame at a time Using the click shuttle on the player (Shuttle mode) Click shuttle JOG y y y Searching for a Scene 41 1 Press JOG. The player enters pause mode. 2 Turn the click shuttle. Depending on the turning speed, playback goes to frame-by-frame playback in the direction that the click shuttle is turned (turn clockwise to go forward, counter clockwise to rewind). If you turn the click shuttle at a constant speed for a while, the playback speed goes to slow or normal. To return to Continuous Play Press H. To turn off the Jog mode Press JOG again so that the indicator turns off. Searching for a Title/ Chapter/Track/Index/ Scene (Search mode) You can search a DVD disc by title or chapter, and you can search a VIDEO CD or CD by track, index, or scene. As titles and tracks are assigned unique numbers on the disc, you can select the desired one by entering its number. Or, you can search for a scene using the time code (Time search). 1 Press DISPLAY. The Control Menu appears. 2 Press X/x to select the search method. xWhen playing a DVD (TITLE), (CHAPTER), or (TIME/ TEXT) Select “TIME/TEXT” for “Time search” (see below). xWhen playing a VIDEO CD (TRACK) or (INDEX) To manually play the disc frame by frame using the click shuttle (Jog mode) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 X/x DISPLAY ENTER CLEAR Number buttons continued www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 1-10 42 xWhen playing a VIDEO CD with PBC Playback (SCENE) xWhen playing a CD (TRACK) or (INDEX) Example: when you select (CHAPTER) “**(**)” is selected (** refers to a number). The number in parentheses indicates the total number of titles, chapters, tracks, indexes, or scenes. 3 Press ENTER. “** (**)” changes to “-- (**).” 4 Select the number of the title, track, scene, time code, etc. you want by pressing X/x or the number buttons to select the digit. If you make a mistake Cancel the number by pressing CLEAR, then select another number. 5 Press ENTER. The player starts playback from the selected number. To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. To search for a scene using the time code (Time search) (DVD only) 1 In Step 2, select (TIME/ TEXT). “T **:**:**” (playing time of the current title) is selected. 2 Press ENTER. “T **:**:**” changes to “T --:--:--.” 3 Input the time code using the number buttons, then press ENTER. For example, to find the scene at 2 hours, 10 minutes, and 20 seconds after the beginning, just enter “2:10:20.” z You can display the first scene of titles, chapters or tracks recorded on the disc on a screen divided into 9 scenes. You can start playback directly by selecting one of the scenes. For details, see page 43. Note The title, chapter, or track number displayed is the same number recorded on the disc. 1 8 ( 3 4 ) 1 2 ( 2 7 ) T 1 : 3 2 : 5 5 DVD PLAY Selected row 1 2 ( 2 7 ) T 1 : 3 2 : 5 5 DVD – – ( 3 4 ) PLAY Searching for a Scene 43 Searching by Scene (VIEWER) You can divide the screen into 9 sub-screens and find the desired scene quickly. 1 Press DISPLAY twice during playback. The Control Menu appears. 2 Press X/x to select (VIEWER), then press ENTER. The options for VIEWER appear. 3 Press X/x to select the item. Refer to the explanations given for each item in the following sections. • STROBE PLAYBACK • TITLE VIEWER (for DVD only) • CHAPTER VIEWER (for DVD only) • TRACK VIEWER (for VIDEO CD only) • ANGLE VIEWER (for DVD only) 4 Press ENTER. To return to the normal play Press O RETURN. To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. Notes • Depending on the disc, you may not be able to select all functions. • The sound is muted when using this function. You can display 9 consecutive moving pictures on the screen. When you press X, the moving pictures pause. Select “STROBE PLAYBACK” in Step 3, then press ENTER in Step 4. You can divide the screen into 9 subscreens and display the first scene of titles, chapters, or tracks. You can also play back from the selected title, chapter, or track. Select the item you want in Step 3, then press ENTER in Step 4. x When playing a DVD Select “TITLE VIEWER” or “CHAPTER VIEWER.” x When playing a VIDEO CD Select “TRACK VIEWER.” The initial scenes of titles, chapters, or tracks appear. ENTER C/X/x/c O RETURN DISPLAY X 1 8 ( 3 4 ) 1 2 ( 2 7 ) T 1 : 3 2 : 5 5 DVD STROBE PLAYBACK ANGLE VIEWER CHAPTER VIEWER TITLE VIEWER STROBE PLAYBACK PLAY Dividing a track into 9 sections (STROBE PLAYBACK) Scanning the title, chapter, or track continued 44 To start playback from the selected scene Select the scene using C/X/x/c, then press ENTER. The playback starts from the selected scene. z If there are more than 9 titles, chapters, or tracks, V is displayed at the bottom right. To display the additional titles, chapters, or tracks, select the bottom right scene (the position 9) and press x. To return to the previous scene, select the top left scene (the position 1), then press X. If various angles (multi-angles) for a scene are recorded on the DVD, you can display all of the angles recorded on the disc on the same screen, and start playback in continuous mode at the chosen angle. The angles are displayed on a screen divided in 9 sections. Select “ANGLE VIEWER” in Step 3, then press ENTER in Step 4. To return to the normal play Press O RETURN. Displaying different angles simultaneously 1 4 7 2 5 8 3 6 9 Viewing Information About the Disc 45 Viewing Information About the Disc Viewing the Playing Time and Remaining Time on the Front Panel Display You can check information about the disc, such as the remaining time, total number of titles of a DVD, or tracks of a CD or VIDEO CD, using the front panel display (page 9). Press TIME/TEXT. Each time you press TIME/TEXT while playing the disc, the display changes as shown in the following charts. When playing a DVD When playing a VIDEO CD (without PBC functions) or CD z When playing VIDEO CDs with PBC functions, the scene number and the playing time are displayed. TIME/TEXT CHAP HOUR MIN SEC TITLE CHAP HOUR MIN SEC TITLE CHAP HOUR MIN SEC CHAP HOUR MIN SEC Title playing time and the current title and chapter number Remaining time of the current title Playing time and number of the current chapter Remaining time of the current chapter Text TRACK INDEX MIN SEC MIN SEC MIN SEC TRACK INDEX MIN SEC Track playing time and the current track and index number Remaining time of the current track Remaining time of the disc Text Playing time of the disc continued www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 1-11 46 z The playing time and remaining time of the current chapter, title, track, scene, or disc will also appear on your TV screen. See the following section “Checking the Playing Time and Remaining Time” for instructions on how to read this information. Note Depending on the type of disc being played and the playing mode, the above mentioned disc information may not be displayed. Checking the Playing Time and Remaining Time You can check the playing time and remaining time of the current title, chapter, or track, and the total playing time or remaining time of the disc. Also, you can check the DVD/CD text recorded on the disc. 1 Press DISPLAY during playback. The Control Menu appears. 2 Press TIME/TEXT repeatedly to change the time information. The display and the kinds of time that you can change depend on the disc you are playing. 0 TIME/TEXT DISPLAY 1 8 ( 3 4 ) 1 2 ( 2 7 ) T 1 : 3 2 : 5 5 DVD PLAY Playing time of title or track Disc type Viewing Information About the Disc 47 xWhen playing a DVD • T **:**:** Playing time of the current title • T–**:**:** Remaining time of the current title • C **:**:** Playing time of the current chapter • C–**:**:** Remaining time of the current chapter xWhen playing a VIDEO CD (with PBC functions) • **:** Playing time of the current scene xWhen playing a VIDEO CD (without PBC functions) or CD • T **:** Playing time of the current track • T–**:** Remaining time of the current track • D **:** Playing time of the current disc • D–**:** Remaining time of the current disc To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. Checking the DVD/CD text Press TIME/TEXT repeatedly in Step 3 to display the text recorded on the DVD/CD. The DVD/CD text appears only when text is recorded in the disc. You cannot change the text. If the disc does not contain text, “NO TEXT” appears. z If the DVD/CD text does not fit on a single line, you can see the entire text by watching it scroll across the front display. z You can select the time and text by pressing TIME/TEXT. Notes • Only letters of the alphabet can be displayed. • This player can only display the first level of DVD/ CD text, such as the disc name or title. TIME/TEXT BRAHMS SYMPHONY NO – 4 DVD/CD text 48 Checking the Play Information (ADVANCED) You can check information such as the bit rate or the disc layer that is being played. While playing a disc, an approximate bit rate of the playback picture is always displayed as Mbps (Mega bit per second) and the audio as kbps (kilo bit per second). 1 Press DISPLAY during playback. The Control Menu is displayed. 2 Press X/x to select (ADVANCED), then press ENTER. The options for ADVANCED appear. 3 Press X/x to select items. For each item, please refer to “Displays of each item.” • BIT RATE: displays the bit rate. • LAYER: displays the layer and the pick-up point. 4 Press ENTER. To close the ADVANCED window Select “OFF” in Step 3. To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. By pressing DISPLAY repeatedly, you can display either “BIT RATE” or “LAYER,” whichever was selected in “ADVANCED.” BIT RATE Bit rate refers to the amount of video/audio data per second in a disc. The higher the bit rate, the larger the amount of data. When the bit rate level is high, there is a large amount of data. However, this does not always mean that you can get higher quality pictures or sounds. LAYER Indicates the approximate point where the disc is playing. If it is a dual-layer DVD, the player indicates which layer is being read (“Layer 0” or “Layer 1”). For details on the layers, see page 79 (DVD). ENTER X/x DISPLAY 1 8 ( 3 4 ) 1 2 ( 2 7 ) T 1 : 3 2 : 5 5 BIT RATE DVD BIT RATE 0 5 10 kbps Mbps 384 PLAY OFF LAYER BIT RATE Displays of each item BIT RATE 0 5 10 kbps Mbps 384 Audio Video Appears when the DVD has dual layers Sound Adjustments 49 Sound Adjustments Changing the Sound If the DVD is recorded with multilingual tracks, you can select the language you want while playing the DVD. If the DVD is recorded in multiple audio formats (PCM, Dolby Digital, or DTS), you can select the audio format you want while playing the DVD. With stereo CDs or VIDEO CDs, you can select the sound from the right or left channel and listen to the sound of the selected channel through both the right and left speakers. (In this case, the sound loses its stereo effect.) For example, when playing a disc containing a song with the vocals on the right channel and the instruments on the left channel, you can select the left channel and hear the instruments from both speakers. 1 Press DISPLAY during playback. The Control Menu is displayed. 2 Press X/x to select (AUDIO), then ENTER. The options for AUDIO appear. 3 Press X/x to select the desired audio signal. xWhen playing a DVD Depending on the DVD, the choice of language varies. When 4 digits are displayed, they represent the language code. Refer to the language code list on page 82 to see which language the code represents. When the same language is displayed two or more times, the DVD is recorded in multiple audio formats. xWhen playing a VIDEO CD or CD The default setting is underlined. • STEREO: The standard stereo sound • 1/L: The sound of the left channel (monaural) • 2/R: The sound of the right channel (monaural) 4 Press ENTER. To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. z You can select “AUDIO” directly by pressing AUDIO. Each time you press the button, the item changes. Notes • For discs not in multiple audio format, you cannot change the sound. • While playing the DVD, the sound may change automatically. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ENTER X/x AUDIO DISPLAY DVD 2: ENGLISH 3: FRENCH 1: ENGLISH 1 8 ( 3 4 ) 1 2 ( 2 7 ) T 1 : 3 2 : 5 5 L R C DOLBY DIGITAL 3/2.1 PROGRAM FORMAT LFE LS RS 1: ENGLISH PLAY continued www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 1-12 50 When you select “AUDIO,” the channels being played are displayed on the screen. For example, in Dolby Digital format, multiple signals ranging from monaural to 5.1 channel signals can be recorded on a DVD. Depending on the DVD, the number of the recorded channels may differ. *“PCM,” “DTS,” or “DOLBY DIGITAL” is displayed. In the case of “DOLBY DIGITAL,” the channels in the playing track are displayed by numbers as follows: For Dolby Digital 5.1 ch: **The letters in the program format display mean the following sound component: L: Front (left) R : Front (right) C : Center LS : Rear (left) RS : Rear (right) S : Rear (monaural): The rear component of the Dolby Surround processed signal or the Dolby Digital signal. LFE :Low Frequency Effect signal The display examples are as follows: • PCM (stereo) • Dolby Surround • Dolby Digital 5.1ch “LFE” is always enclosed in a solid line regardless of the LFE signal component being output. • DTS “LFE” is always enclosed in a solid line regardless of the LFE signal component being output. Notes • When the signal contains rear signal components such as “LS,” “RS” or “S,” the surround effect is enhanced (page 51). • If “DTS” is set to “OFF” in “AUDIO SETUP” (page 75), the DTS track selection option will not appear on the screen even if the disc contains DTS tracks. Displaying the audio information of the disc DVD 1: ENGLISH 1 8 ( 3 4 ) 1 2 ( 2 7 ) T 1 : 3 2 : 5 5 L R C DOLBY DIGITAL 3/2.1 PROGRAM FORMAT LFE LS RS PLAY Current audio format* Currently playing program format** DOLBY DIGITAL 3 / 2 . 1 LFE (Low Frequency Effect) component 1 Rear component 2 Front component 2 + Center component 1 PCM 48kHz 24bit PROGRAM FORMAT DOLBY SURROUND DOLBY DIGITAL 2/0 L R C S PROGRAM FORMAT L R C DOLBY DIGITAL 3/2.1 PROGRAM FORMAT LFE LS RS L R C DTS 3/2.1 PROGRAM FORMAT LFE LS RS Sound Adjustments 51 TV Virtual Surround Sound Settings (TVS) When you connect a stereo TV or 2 front speakers, TV Virtual Surround lets you enjoy surround sound effects by using sound imaging to create virtual rear speakers from the sound of the front speakers (L: left, R: right) without using actual rear speakers. This function is designed to work with the LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks. Note that if you select one of the TVS settings while playing a DVD, the player does not output Dolby Digital signals from the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL and OPTICAL) jacks (when you set “DOLBY DIGITAL” in “AUDIO SETUP” to “D-PCM”) (page 75). 1 Press DISPLAY during playback. The Control Menu appears. 2 Press X/x to select (TVS), then press ENTER. The options for “TVS” appear. 3 Press X/x to select one of the TVS (TV Virtual Surround) sounds. Refer to the following explanations given for each item. •TVS DYNAMIC •TVS WIDE •TVS NIGHT •TVS STANDARD 4 Press ENTER. To reset the TVS setting Select “OFF” in Step 3. To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. TVS (TV Virtual Surround) DYNAMIC Uses sound imaging to create virtual rear speakers from the sound of the front speakers (L/R) without using actual rear speakers (shown below). The sound imaging effect is distinct and clearly reproduces each aural element of the audio track. This mode is effective when the distance between the front L and R speakers is short, such as with built-in speakers on a stereo TV. ENTER X/x DISPLAY SURROUND TVS DYNAMIC OFF TVS WIDE OFF 1 8 ( 3 4 ) 1 2 ( 2 7 ) T 1 : 3 2 : 5 5 DVD VIRTUAL 3D SURROUND PLAY TV continued 52 TVS (TV Virtual Surround) WIDE Uses sound imaging to create virtual rear speakers from the sound of the front speakers (L/R) without using actual rear speakers. The virtual speakers are reproduced as shown in the illustration below. This gives the sound an expanded effect that fills the area surrounding the listener. This mode is effective when the distance between the front L and R speakers is short, such as with built-in speakers on a stereo TV. TVS (TV Virtual Surround) NIGHT Large sounds, such as explosions, are suppressed, but the quieter sounds are unaffected. This feature is useful when you don’t want to disturb other people but still want to hear the dialog and enjoy the surround sound effects of TVS WIDE. TVS (TV Virtual Surround) STANDARD Uses sound imaging to create virtual rear speakers from the sound of the front speakers (L/R) without using actual rear speakers. The virtual speakers are reproduced as shown in the illustration below. Use this setting when you want to use TVS with 2 separate speakers and retain the sound quality. z You can select “TVS” directly by pressing SURROUND on the remote or player. Each time you press the button, the item changes. If you select any TVS setting other than “OFF,” the indicator on the player lights up. Notes • When you select an effect, the sound cuts off for a moment. • When the playing signal does not contain a signal for the rear speakers (page 50), the surround effects may be difficult to hear. • When you select one of the TVS modes, turn off the surround setting of the connected TV or amplifier (receiver). • Make sure that your listening position is between and at an equal distance from your speakers, and that the speakers are located in similar surroundings. Otherwise, the TVS effect may be hard to discern. • TVS NIGHT only works with Dolby Digital discs. However, not all discs will respond to the TVS NIGHT function in the same way. • If you use the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks, the sound output from your speakers will not have the TVS effect. L : Front speaker (left) R : Front speaker (right) : Virtual speaker TV L R Enjoying Movies 53 Enjoying Movies Changing the Angles If various angles (multi-angles) for a scene are recorded on the DVD, “ANGLE” appears in the front panel display. This means that you can change the viewing angle. For example, while playing a scene of a train in motion, you can display the view from either the front of the train, the left window of the train, or from the right window without having the train’s movement interrupted. 1 Press DISPLAY during playback. The Control Menu appears. 2 Press X/x to select (ANGLE). The number of the angle appears. The number in parentheses indicates the total number of angles. 3 Press c or ENTER. The number of the angle changes to “-.” 4 Select the angle number using the number buttons or X/x, then press ENTER. The angle changes to the selected angle. To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. z You can select the angle directly by pressing ANGLE. Each time you press the button, the angle changes. z You can display all the angles recorded on the disc on the same screen, and start playback directly in continuous mode from the chosen angle. The angles are displayed on a screen divided in 9 sections. For details, see page 43. Note Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change the angles even if multi-angles are recorded on the DVD. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ENTER X/x/c Number Buttons ANGLE DISPLAY 1 8 ( 3 4 ) 1 2 ( 2 7 ) T 1 : 3 2 : 5 5 DVD 1 ( 9 ) PLAY 1 8 ( 3 4 ) 1 2 ( 2 7 ) T 1 : 3 2 : 5 5 DVD PLAY – ( 9 ) www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 1-13 54 Displaying the Subtitles If subtitles are recorded on the discs, you can turn the subtitles on and off whenever you want while playing. If multilingual subtitles are recorded on the disc, you can change the subtitle language while playing, and turn it on or off whenever you want. For example, you can select the language you want to practice and turn the subtitles on for better understanding. 1 Press DISPLAY during playback. The Control Menu appears. 2 Press X/x to select (SUBTITLE), then press ENTER. The options for SUBTITLE appear. 3 Press X/x to select the language. Depending on the DVD, the choice of language varies. When 4 digits are displayed, they indicate the language code. Refer to the language code list on page 82 to see which language the code represents. 4 Press ENTER. To cancel the SUBTITLE setting Select “OFF” in Step 3. To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. z You can select SUBTITLE directly by pressing SUBTITLE. Each time you press the button, the item changes. Note Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change the subtitles even if multilingual subtitles are recorded on the DVD. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ENTER X/x SUBTITLE DISPLAY 1 8 ( 3 4 ) 1 2 ( 2 7 ) T 1 : 3 2 : 5 5 OFF 1: ENGLISH 2: FRENCH 3: SPANISH OFF DVD PLAY Enjoying Movies 55 Adjusting the Picture Quality (BNR) The Block Noise Reduction (BNR) function adjusts the picture quality by reducing the “block noise” or mosaic like patterns that appear on your TV screen. 1 Press DISPLAY twice during playback. The Control Menu appears. 2 Press X/x to select (BNR), then press ENTER. The options for BNR appear. 3 Press X/x to select a level. As the value increases, the mosaic like patterns on your TV screen will decrease. • 1: reduces the “block noise.” • 2: reduces the “block noise” more than 1. • 3: reduces the “block noise” more than 2. 4 Press ENTER. The disc plays with the setting you selected. To cancel the BNR setting Select “OFF” in Step 3. To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. z You can set BNR while the player is stopped. z You can select BNR directly by pressing BNR on the remote or player. Each time you press the button, the item changes. If you select any setting other than “OFF,” the indicator on the player lights up. Notes • If the outlines of the images on your screen should become blurred, set “BNR” to “OFF.” • Depending on the disc or the scene being played, the BNR effect may be hard to discern. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 X/x BNR ENTER DISPLAY OFF 1 2 3 DVD OFF PLAY 1 8 ( 3 4 ) 1 2 ( 2 7 ) T 1 : 3 2 : 5 5 56 Adjusting the Playback Picture (VIDEO EQUALIZER) You can adjust the video signal of the DVD or VIDEO CD from the player, not from the TV, to obtain the picture quality you want. Choose the video mode that suits the program you are watching. When you select “MEMORY t,” you can make further adjustments to each element of the picture (color, brightness, etc.). 1 Press DISPLAY twice during playback. The Control Menu appears. 2 Press X/x to select (VIDEO EQUALIZER), then press ENTER. The options for VIDEO EQUALIZER appear. 3 Press X/x to select the setting you want. • STANDARD: displays a standard picture. • DYNAMIC 1: produces a bold dynamic picture by increasing the picture contrast and the color intensity. • DYNAMIC 2: produces a more dynamic picture than DYNAMIC 1 by further increasing the picture contrast and the color intensity. • CINEMA 1: enhances details in dark areas by increasing the black level. • CINEMA 2: White colors become brighter and black colors become richer, and the color contrast is increased. • MEMORY t: adjusts the picture in greater detail. 4 press ENTER To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. z When you watch a movie “CINEMA 1” or “CINEMA 2” is recommended. z You can set VIDEO EQUALIZER while the player is stopped. You can adjust each element of the picture individually. • PICTURE: changes the contrast • BRIGHTNESS: changes the overall brightness • COLOR: makes the colors deeper or lighter • HUE: changes the color balance X/x ENTER DISPLAY 1 8 ( 3 4 ) 1 2 ( 2 7 ) T 1 : 3 2 : 5 5 DVD DYNAMIC 1 DYNAMIC 2 CINEMA 1 STANDARD STANDARD S l C l VIDEO EQUALIZER PLAY Adjusting the picture items in “MEMORY” X/x ENTER DISPLAY O RETURN Enjoying Movies 57 1 Press DISPLAY twice during playback. The Control Menu appears. 2 Press X/x to select (VIDEO EQUALIZER), then press ENTER. 3 Press X/x to select “MEMORY t,” and press ENTER. The video equalizer display appears. 4 Select the picture item you want to adjust using X/x, then press ENTER. The adjustment bar of the selected item appears. 5 Adjust the selected picture item using C/c, then press ENTER. The setting is stored in memory. To cancel adjusting the picture Press O RETURN before pressing ENTER to return to Step 2. 6 To adjust other items, repeat Steps 4 and 5. To turn off the video equalizer memory display Press O RETURN. z To reset all of the picture items, select “RESET” in Step 4. Note Only one set of “MEMORY t” adjustments can be stored. When you adjust the items again, the new setting erases the previous setting. 1 8 ( 3 4 ) 1 2 ( 2 7 ) T 1 : 3 2 : 5 5 DVD DYNAMIC 1 DYNAMIC 2 CINEMA 1 STANDARD STANDARD PLAY ( ) C 0 1 : 3 2 : 5 5 VIDEO EQUALIZER PICTURE BRIGHTNESS COLOR HUE RESET www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 1-14 58 Enhancing the Playback Picture (DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER) The Digital Video Enhancer function makes the picture appear clear and crisp by enhancing the outlines of images on your TV screen. Also, this function can soften the images on the screen. 1 Press DISPLAY twice during playback. The Control Menu appears. 2 Press X/x to select (DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER), then press ENTER. The options for DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER appear. 3 Press X/x to select a level. As the value increases, the outlines of images on your TV screen will become crisper. • 1: enhances the outline. • 2: enhances the outline more than 1. • 3: enhances the outline more than 2. • SOFT: softens the image (DVD only). 4 Press ENTER. The disc plays with the setting you selected. To cancel the DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER setting Select “OFF” in Step 3. To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. z You can set DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER while the player is stopped. Note Depending on the DVD/VIDEO CD disc or the scene being played, noise found in the disc may become more apparent. If this happens, reduce the Digital Video Enhancer level. DISPLAY X/x ENTER 1 8 ( 3 4 ) 1 2 ( 2 7 ) T 1 : 3 2 : 5 5 DVD OFF 3 2 1 OFF PLAY SOFT Using Various Additional Functions 59 Using Various Additional Functions Locking Discs (CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL, PARENTAL CONTROL) You can set two kinds of playback restrictions for the desired disc. • Custom Parental Control You can set the playback restrictions so that the player will not play inappropriate discs. • Parental Control Playback of some DVDs can be limited according to a predetermined level such as the age of the users. The same password is used for both Parental Control and Custom Parental Control. You can set the same Custom Parental Control password for up to 50 discs. When you set the fifty-first-disc, the first disc is canceled. 1 Insert the disc you want to lock. If the disc is playing, press x to stop playback. 2 Press DISPLAY while the player is in stop mode. The Control Menu appears. 3 Press X/x to select (CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL), then press ENTER. “CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL” is selected. 4 Press X/x to select “ON t,” then press ENTER. xIf you have not entered a password The display for registering a new password appears. Enter a 4-digit password by using the number buttons, then press ENTER. The display for confirming the password appears. xWhen you have already registered a password The display for entering the password appears. Custom Parental Control 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 O RETURN C/X/x DISPLAY ENTER Number buttons x OFF ON PASSWORD DVD 1 8 ( 3 4 ) 1 2 ( 2 7 ) T 1 : 3 2 : 5 5 STOP CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL Enter a new 4-digit password, then press . ENTER CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL Enter password, then press . ENTER continued 60 5 Enter or re-enter your 4-digit password by using the number buttons, then press ENTER. “Custom parental control is set.” appears and then the screen returns to the Control Menu. If you make a mistake entering your password Press C before you press ENTER and input the correct number. If you make a mistake Press O RETURN, then repeat from Step 3 again. To turn off the Control Menu Press O RETURN, then press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. To turn off the Custom Parental Control function 1 In Step 4, select “OFF t,” then press ENTER. 2 Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. To change the password 1 In Step 4, press X/x to select “PASSWORD t,” then press ENTER. The display for entering the password appears. 2 Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. 3 Enter a new 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. 4 To confirm your password, re-enter it using the number buttons, then press ENTER. 1 Insert the disc for which Custom Parental Control is set. The CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL display appears. 2 Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. The player is ready for playback. z If you forget your password, enter the 6-digit number “199703” using the number buttons when the CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL display asks you for your password, then press ENTER. The display will ask you to enter a new 4-digit password. Playback of some DVDs can be limited according to a predetermined level such as the age of the users. The Parental Control function allows you to set a playback limitation level. A scene that is limited is not played, or it is replaced by a different scene. Playing the disc for which Custom Parental Control is set Limiting playback by children (Parental Control) CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL Custom parental control is already set. To play, enter your password and press . ENTER Using Various Additional Functions 61 1 Press DISPLAY while the player is in stop mode. The Control Menu appears. 2 Press X/x to select (SETUP), then press ENTER. 3 Press X/x select “CUSTOM,” then press ENTER. The Setup Display appears. 4 Press X/x to select “CUSTOM SETUP,” then press ENTER. CUSTOM SETUP is displayed. 5 Press X/x to select “PARENTAL CONTROL t,” then press ENTER. xIf you have not entered a password The display for registering a new password appears. Enter a 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. The display for confirming the password appears. xWhen you have already registered a password The display for entering the password appears. 6 Enter or re-enter your password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. The display for setting the playback limitation level and changing the password appears. 7 Press X/x to select “STANDARD,” then press ENTER. The selection items for “STANDARD” are displayed. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 O RETURN ENTER DISPLAY X/x H Number buttons CUSTOM SETUP AUTO PLAY: DIMMER: PAUSE MODE: OFF BRIGHT AUTO TRACK SELECTION: OFF ON PARENTAL CONTROL PLAYBACK MEMORY: CUSTOM SETUP PARENTAL CONTROL Enter a new 4-digit password, then press . ENTER CUSTOM SETUP PARENTAL CONTROL Enter password, then press . ENTER CUSTOM SETUP PARENTAL CONTROL LEVEL: OFF USA STANDARD: CHANGE PASSWORD continued www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 1-15 62 8 Press X/x to select a geographic area as the playback limitation level, then press ENTER. The area is selected. When you select “OTHERS t,” select and enter the standard code in the table on page 63 using the number buttons. 9 Press ENTER. The selection items for “LEVEL” are displayed. 10 Select the level you want using X/x, then press ENTER. Parental Control setting is complete. The lower the value, the more strict the limitation. If you make a mistake Press O RETURN to go back to the previous screen. To turn off the Setup Display Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Setup Display is turned off. To turn off the Parental Control function and play the DVD after entering your password Set “LEVEL” to “OFF” in Step 10. To change the password 1 In Step 7, select “CHANGE PASSWORD t” using x, then press ENTER. The display for entering the password appears. 2 Follow Step 6 to enter a new password. 1 Insert the disc and press H. The PARENTAL CONTROL display appears. 2 Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. The player starts playback. z If you forget your password, remove the disc and repeat Step 1 to 5 of “Limiting playback by children.” When you are asked to enter your password, enter “199703” using the number buttons, then press ENTER. The display will ask you to enter a new 4- digit password. After you enter a new 4-digit password in Step 6, replace the disc in the player and press H. When the PARENTAL CONTROL display appears, enter your new password. Notes • When you play DVDs which do not have the Parental Control function, playback cannot be limited on this player. • Depending on the DVD, you may be asked to change the parental control level while playing the disc. In this case, enter your password, then change the level. If the Resume Play mode is canceled, the level returns to the original level. CUSTOM SETUP PARENTAL CONTROL LEVEL: OFF USA STANDARD: CHANGE PASSWORD USA OTHERS CUSTOM SETUP PARENTAL CONTROL LEVEL: OFF OFF STANDARD: CHANGE PASSWORD 8: 7: 6: 5: NC17 R CUSTOM SETUP PARENTAL CONTROL LEVEL: STANDARD: CHANGE PASSWORD USA 4: PG13 Playing a disc for which Parental Control is set Using Various Additional Functions 63 Area Code Operation Sound Effects (Sound Feedback) The player beeps when the following operations are performed. The default setting of the Sound Feedback function is set to off. 1 Press POWER on the player, then press [/1 on the remote. The power indicator lights up in green. When there is a disc in the player, press A and remove the disc. Then press A again to close the disc tray. 2 Press and hold X on the player for more than two seconds. You will hear one beep and the Sound Feedback function is turned on. Standard Code number Argentina 2044 Australia 2047 Austria 2046 Belgium 2057 Brazil 2070 Canada 2079 Chile 2090 China 2092 Denmark 2115 Finland 2165 France 2174 Germany 2109 Hong Kong` 2219 India 2248 Indonesia 2238 Italy 2254 Japan 2276 Korea 2304 Malaysia 2363 Mexico 2362 Netherlands 2376 New Zealand 2390 Norway 2379 Pakistan 2427 Philippines 2424 Portugal 2436 Russia 2489 Singapore 2501 Spain 2149 Sweden 2499 Switzerland 2086 Taiwan 2543 Thailand 2528 United Kingdom 2184 Standard Code number Operation Operation sound Power is turned on One beep Power is turned off Two beeps H is pressed One beep X is pressed Two beeps Playback is stopped One long beep Operation is not possible Three beeps To set Sound Feedback 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 [/1 A X POWER Power indicator continued 64 To turn off the Sound Feedback function When there is no disc in the player, press and hold X on the player for more than two seconds. You will hear two beeps and the Sound Feedback function is turned off. Controlling Your TV or AV Amplifier (Receiver) with the Supplied Remote By adjusting the remote signal, you can control your TV or AV amplifier (receiver) with the supplied remote. The default signal (01) will control Sony TVs. If you connect the player to an AV amplifier (receiver), you can control the volume with the supplied remote. Notes • Depending on the units being connected, you may not be able to control your TV or AV amplifier (receiver) using some of the buttons below. • If you enter a new code number, the code number previously entered will be erased. • When you replace the batteries of the remote, the code number you have set may be reset to the default setting. Set the appropriate code number again. 1 Slide the TV/DVD switch to TV. 2 Hold down [/1, and enter your TV’s manufacturer’s code (see the table below) using the number buttons. 3 Release [/1. Code numbers of controllable TVs If more than one code number is listed, try entering them one at a time until you find the one that works with your TV. Controlling TVs with the remote 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 TV/DVD Number buttons [/1 VOL +/– TV/VIDEO Using Various Additional Functions 65 Controlling the TV When you set the TV/DVD switch to TV, you can control the sound level, input source, channel selection and power switch of your TV with the supplied remote. 1 Slide the TV/DVD switch to DVD. 2 Hold down [/1, and enter your AV amplifier (receiver)’s manufacturer’s code (see the table below) using the number button. 3 Release [/1. Code numbers of controllable AV amplifier (receiver) If more than one code number is listed, try entering them one at a time until you find the one that works with your AV amplifier (receiver). Manufacture Code number Sony (default) 01 Akai 04 AOC 04 Centurion 12 Coronado 03 Curtis-Mathes 12 Daytron 12 Emerson 03,04,14 Fisher 11 General Electric 06,10 Gold Star 03,04,17 Hitachi 02,03 J.C.Penney 04,12 JVC 09 KMC 03 Magnavox 03,08,12 Marantz 04,13 MGA/Mitsubishi 04,12,13,17 NEC 04,12 Panasonic 06,19 Philco 03,04 Philips 08,21 Pioneer 16 Portland 03 Quasar 06,18 Radio Shack 05,14 RCA 04,10 Sampo 12 Samsung 20 Sanyo 11 Scott 12 Sears 07,10,11 Sharp 03,05,18 Sylvania 08,12 Teknika 03,08,14 Toshiba 07 Wards 03,04,12 Yorx 12 Zenith 15 Manufacture Code number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 TV/DVD Number buttons [/1 TV/VIDEO VOL +/– ENTER By pressing You can [/1 Turn the TV on or off VOL (volume) +/– Adjust the volume of the TV TV/VIDEO Switch the TV’s input source between the TV and other input sources Number buttons and ENTER Select the channel of the TV Controlling the volume of your AV amplifier (receiver) with the remote 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Number buttons [/1 VOL +/– TV/DVD continued www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 1-16 66 Controlling the AV amplifiers (receivers) When you set the TV/DVD switch to DVD, you can control the volume of the AV amplifier (receiver) using VOL +/–. Note Depending on the AV amplifier (receiver), you may not be able to control your AV amplifier (receiver). Manufacturer Code number Sony 91, 89 Denon 84, 85, 86 Kenwood 92, 93 Onkyo 81, 82, 83 Pioneer 99 Sansui 87 Technics 97, 98 Yamaha 94, 95, 96 Settings and Adjustments 67 Settings and Adjustments Using the Setup Display By using the Setup Display, you can make various adjustments to items such as picture and sound. You can also set a language for the subtitles and the Setup Display, among other things. For details on each Setup Display item see page 68. For an overall list of Setup Display items, see page 83. 1 Press DISPLAY when the player is in stop mode. The Control Menu appears. 2 Press X/x to select (SETUP), then press ENTER. The options for SETUP appear. 3 Press X/x to select “CUSTOM,” then press ENTER. The Setup Display appears. 4 Press X/x to select the setup item from the displayed list: “LANGUAGE SETUP,” “SCREEN SETUP,” “CUSTOM SETUP,” or “AUDIO SETUP.” Then press ENTER. The selected setup item appears. Example: SCREEN SETUP 5 Select an item using X/x, then press ENTER. The options for the selected item appear. Example: TV TYPE How to use the Setup Display DISPLAY ENTER X/x ( 47 ) : : QUICK CUSTOM RESET DVD QUICK STOP LANGUAGE SETUP DVD MENU: AUDIO: SUBTITLE: ORIGINAL ENGLISH OSD: ENGLISH ENGLISH SCREEN SETUP TV TYPE: SCREEN SAVER: BACKGROUND: 4:3 LETTER BOX ON JACKET PICTURE COMPONENT OUT: INTERLACE MODE: AUTO Setup items Selected item SCREEN SETUP TV TYPE: SCREEN SAVER: BACKGROUND: COMPONENT OUT: 16:9 4:3 LETTER BOX 4:3 PAN SCAN MODE: AUTO 4:3 LETTER BOX Options continued 68 6 Select a setting using X/x, then press ENTER. The setting is selected and setup is complete. Example: 16:9 To turn off the Setup Display Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Setup Display is turned off. z If you select “QUICK” in Step 3, you will enter the Quick Setup mode (page 25). Follow from Step 5 of the Quick Setup explanation to make basic adjustments. z If you select “RESET” in Step 3, you can reset all of the “SETUP” settings on page 83 and 84 (except for “PARENTAL CONTROL”) to the default settings. After you select “RESET” and press ENTER, select “YES” and press ENTER to reset the settings (it takes a few seconds to complete), or select “NO” and press ENTER to return to the Control Menu. Do not press POWER or [/1 when resetting the player. Setting the Display or Sound Track Language (LANGUAGE SETUP) “LANGUAGE SETUP” allows you to set various languages for the on-screen display or sound track. Select “LANGUAGE SETUP” in the Setup Display. For details on using the display, see “Using the Setup Display” (page 67). xOSD (On-Screen Display) Switches the display language on the screen. Select the language from the displayed list. xDVD MENU (DVD only) You can select the desired language for the DVD menu. xAUDIO (DVD only) Switches the language of the sound track. Select the language from the displayed list. When you select “ORIGINAL,” the language given priority in the disc is selected. xSUBTITLE (DVD only) Switches the language of the subtitle recorded on the DVD. Select the language from the displayed list. When you select “AUDIO FOLLOW,” the language for the subtitles changes according to the language you selected for the sound track. SCREEN SETUP TV TYPE: SCREEN SAVER: BACKGROUND: 16:9 ON JACKETPICTURE COMPONENT OUT: INTERLACE MODE: AUTO Selected setting LANGUAGE SETUP OSD: DVD MENU: AUDIO: SUBTITLE: ENGLISH ENGLISH ORIGINAL ENGLISH Settings and Adjustments 69 z If you select “OTHERS t” in “DVD MENU,” “SUBTITLE,” and “AUDIO,” select and enter a language code from the “Language code list” (page 82) using the number buttons. After you have made a selection, the language code (4 digits) is displayed the next time you select “OTHERS t.” Note When you select a language that is not recorded on the DVD, one of the recorded languages will be automatically selected (except for the “OSD”). Settings for the Display (SCREEN SETUP) Choose settings according to the TV to be connected. Select “SCREEN SETUP” in the Setup Display. For details on using the display, see “Using the Setup Display” (page 67). The default settings are underlined. xTV TYPE (DVD only) Selects the aspect ratio of the connected TV (4:3 standard or wide). 4:3 LETTER BOX Select this when you connect a 4:3 screen TV. Displays a wide picture with bands on the upper and lower portions of the screen. 4:3 PAN SCAN Select this when you connect a 4:3 screen TV. Automatically displays the wide picture on the entire screen and cuts off the portions that do not fit. 16:9 Select this when you connect a wide-screen TV or a TV with a wide mode function. SCREEN SETUP TV TYPE: SCREEN SAVER: BACKGROUND: 4:3 LETTER BOX ON JACKET PICTURE COMPONENT OUT: INTERLACE MODE: AUTO continued www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 1-17 70 Note Depending on the DVD, “4:3 LETTER BOX” maybe selected automatically instead of “4:3 PAN SCAN” or vice versa. xSCREEN SAVER Turns on and off the screen saver so that the screen saver image appears when you leave the player in pause or stop mode for 15 minutes, or when you play back a CD for more than 15 minutes. The screen saver will help prevent your display device from becoming damaged (ghosting). Press H to turn off the screen saver. xBACKGROUND Selects the background color or picture on the TV screen in stop mode or while playing a CD. xCOMPONENT OUT This will change the type of signal output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks on the player. See page 71 for more information about the different types. z When the player outputs a Progressive video signal, the PROGRESSIVE indicator lights up. Note If you select “PROGRESSIVE” when you connect the player to a TV that cannot accept the signal in progressive format (480p), the image quality will deteriorate. In this case, set the VIDEO OUT SCAN SELECT switch on the back panel of the player to INTERLACE. Then set “COMPONENT OUT” to “INTERLACE” when you can see the TV screen correctly, and reset VIDEO OUT SCAN SELECT to SELECTABLE. You can fine-tune the Progressive (480p) video signal output when you select “PROGRESSIVE” in “COMPONENT OUT” of the “CUSTOM SETUP” display and connect the player to the TV that is able to accept the video signal in progressive format (480p). xMODE (Conversion Modes) DVD software can be divided into two types: film based software and video based software. Video based software is derived from TV, such as dramas and sit-coms, and displays images at 30 frames/60 fields per ON Turns on the screen saver. OFF Turns off the screen saver. JACKET PICTURE The jacket picture (still picture) appears in the background, but only when the jacket picture is already recorded on the disc (CD-EXTRA, etc.). If the disc does not contain a jacket picture, the “GRAPHICS” picture appears. GRAPHICS A preset picture stored in the player appears in the background. BLUE The background color is blue. 16:9 4:3 LETTER BOX 4:3 PAN SCAN BLACK The background color is black. INTERLACE This outputs the signal in interlace format. Select this when you are connected to a standard (interlace format) TV. PROGRESSIVE This outputs the signal in progressive (480p) format. Select this when you have a TV that can accept progressive signals. When “PROGRESSIVE” is selected in “COMPONENT OUT” Settings and Adjustments 71 second. Film based software is derived from film and displays images at 24 frames per second. In order for these images to appear natural on your screen when output in PROGRESSIVE mode (60 frames per second), the progressive video signal needs to be converted to match the type of DVD software that you are watching. For more information about conversion modes, see “Progressive Conversion Methods of Film Based and Video Based Software.” Notes • Some DVD software contains both Video and Film. For instance, DVDs of movies may contain the movie taken on film, and a “Making of” sequence taken on video. • When you play video based software with progressive signals, sections of some types of images may appear unnatural due to the conversion process when output through the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks. Images from the S VIDEO OUT and LINE OUT (VIDEO) 1/2 jacks are unaffected as they are output in the interlace format. This player converts video based software and film based software in the following manner. Video based software conversion Video shows an image by alternately displaying every other line of an image (field) at 30 frames (60 fields) per second (Interlace format). The Interlace format displays 30 frames (60 fields) per second by displaying every other line of the image, causing scanning lines to appear across the image. Furthermore, since only half of the image is shown at once, the amount of information contained in an image is limited. The Progressive format displays 60 entire frames per seconds. The player accomplishes this by converting each field into a frame by using either a field-based conversion method or a frame-based conversion method. The appropriate method is automatically selected by the player according to the movement of the images on the screen. If the movement on the screen is slow, the frame-based conversion method borrows adjacent field information to fill in the missing information. If the movement on the screen is rapid, the field-based conversion method creates the missing information by predicting the movement of the images on the screen from field to field. The end result is an image that is higher in quality when compared to the Interlace format. AUTO This will automatically detect if you are playing Film based or Video based software and convert the signal to the appropriate conversion mode. Normally select this position. VIDEO This will set the conversion mode for Video based software, regardless of the type of software that you are playing. Progressive Conversion Methods of Film Based and Video Based Software continued 72 Film based software conversion Film shows an image by displaying an entire image at 24 frames per second. When you watch a film on television, the television displays every other line of the frame as a field, thus reducing information level and the clarity of the film image. This player solves this problem by increasing the speed at which the frames are displayed, consecutively showing 3 identical frames followed by 2 identical frames in the time that it normally takes to show 2 consecutive frames. The end result is that the 24 frames per second are increased to 60 frames per second, which is the speed at which Progressive video signals are shown. This not only allows film to be shown in a frame based format, it also increases the clarity and sharpness which is unique to Progressive format images. Custom Settings (CUSTOM SETUP) Allows setting up Parental Control and other settings. Select “CUSTOM SETUP” in the Setup Display. For details on using the display, see “Using the Setup Display” (page 67). The default settings are underlined. xAUTO PLAY Select the Auto Play setting when you turn on the player. xDIMMER Adjusts the lighting of the front panel display. Converted progressive pictures Interlace pictures Interlace pictures Converted progressive pictures OFF Does not use “TIMER,” “DEMO1,” or “DEMO2” to start playback. TIMER Starts playing when the player is turned on. The player can start playback at any time when connected to a timer (not supplied). Set the timer when the player is in standby mode (the power indicator lights up in red). DEMO1 Starts playing the first demonstration automatically. DEMO2 Starts playing the second demonstration automatically. BRIGHT Makes the front panel display bright. DARK Makes the front panel display dark. OFF Turns off the lighting of the front panel display. CUSTOM SETUP AUTO PLAY: DIMMER: PAUSE MODE: OFF BRIGHT AUTO TRACK SELECTION: OFF ON PARENTAL CONTROL PLAYBACK MEMORY: Settings and Adjustments 73 xPAUSE MODE (DVD only) Selects the picture in pause mode. xPARENTAL CONTROL t (DVD only) Set a password and playback limitation level for DVDs with playback limitation for children. For details, see “Limiting playback by children (Parental Control)” (page 60). xPLAYBACK MEMORY The player can store the SUBTITLE and other settings of each disc for up to 50 discs (Playback Memory). Set the Playback Memory function ON or OFF. The following settings are stored in memory by the Playback Memory function. —AUDIO (page 49)* —BNR (page 55) —DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER (page 58) —SUBTITLE (page 54)* —SURROUND (page 51) —VIDEO EQUALIZER (page 56) *DVD only Notes • The player can store the settings of up to 50 discs. When you store the setting of disc number 51, the first disc setting is canceled. • Depending on the DVD, the information stored in the disc takes priority over the Playback Memory settings and the function does not work. • During playback, do not turn off the player by pressing POWER on the player. Doing so may cancel the settings. When you turn off the player, press x first to stop playback and then press [/1 on the remote. After the power indicator lights up in red and the player enters standby mode, press POWER on the player. xTRACK SELECTION (DVD only) Gives the sound track which contains the highest number of channels priority when you play a DVD on which multiple audio formats (PCM, DTS, or Dolby Digital format) are recorded. Notes • When you set the item to “AUTO,” the language may change. The “TRACK SELECTION” setting has higher priority than the “AUDIO” settings in “LANGUAGE SETUP” (page 68). • If you set “DTS” to “OFF” (page 75), the DTS sound track is not played even if you set “TRACK SELECTION” to “AUTO”. • If PCM, DTS, and Dolby Digital sound tracks have the same number of channels, the player selects PCM, DTS, and Dolby Digital sound tracks in this order. • Depending on the DVD, the audio channel with priority may be predetermined. In this case, you cannot give priority to the DTS or Dolby Digital format by selecting “AUTO.” AUTO The picture, including subjects that move dynamically, is output with no jitter. Normally select this position. FRAME The picture, including subjects that do not move dynamically, is output in high resolution. ON Stores the settings in memory when you eject the disc. OFF Does not store the settings in memory. OFF No priority given. AUTO Priority given. www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 1-18 74 Settings for the Sound (AUDIO SETUP) “AUDIO SETUP” allows you to set the sound according to the playback and connection conditions. Select “AUDIO SETUP” in the Setup Display. For details on using the display, see “Using the Setup Display” (page 67). The default settings are underlined. xAUDIO ATT (attenuation) If the playback sound is distorted, set this item to “ON.” The player reduces the audio output level. This function affects the output of the following jacks: —LINE OUT (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks xAUDIO DRC (Dynamic Range Control) (DVD only) Makes the sound clear when the volume is turned down when playing a DVD that has the AUDIO DRC function. This affects the output from the following jacks: —LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks —DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks only when “DOLBY DIGITAL” is set to “D-PCM” (page 75). xDOWNMIX (DVD only) Switches the mixing down methods when you play a DVD on which rear signal components such as LS, RS, or S are recorded in Dolby Digital format. For details on the rear signal components, see “Changing the Sound” (page 49). This function affects the output of the following jacks: —LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks —DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXICAL) jacks when “DOLBY DIGITAL” is set to “D-PCM” (page 75). OFF Turns off the audio attenuation. Normally, select this position. ON Reduces the audio output level so that no sound distortion occurs. Select this when the playback sound from the speakers is distorted. AUDIO SETUP AUDIO ATT: AUDIO DRC: DIGITAL OUT: OFF STANDARD ON DOWNMIX: DOLBY SURROUND DOLBY DIGITAL: D-PCM DTS: OFF STANDARD Normally, select this position. TV MODE Makes the low sounds clear even if you turn the volume down. It is especially recommended when you listen to the sound using the speakers of the TV. WIDE RANGE Gives you the feeling of being at a live performance. When you use high quality speakers, it is even more effective. DOLBY SURROUND Select this when the player is connected to an audio component that conforms to Dolby Surround (Pro Logic). The output signals which reproduce the Dolby Surround effect are downmixed to 2 channels. NORMAL Select this when the player is connected to an audio component that does not conform to Dolby Surround (Pro Logic). All of the output signals are downmixed to 2 channels without the Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) effect. Settings and Adjustments 75 xDIGITAL OUT Selects if DTS signals are output via the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks. Switches the method of outputting audio signals when you connect the following component using a optical or a coaxial digital cord via the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks. —Amplifier (receiver) with digital input jack —Amplifier (receiver) with a built-in DTS or DOLBY DIGITAL decoder —MD or DAT deck For connection details, see page 20. Select “DOLBY DIGITAL” and “DTS” after setting “DIGITAL OUT” to “ON.” xDOLBY DIGITAL Selects the Dolby Digital signals output via the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks. Note If you select one of the TVS settings while playing a DVD, the player does not output Dolby Digital signals from the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL and OPTICAL) jacks (when you set “DOLBY DIGITAL” in “AUDIO SETUP” to “D-PCM”). xDTS Selects if DTS signals are output via the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks. ON Normally, select this position. When you select “ON,” set “DOLBY DIGITAL” and “DTS.” For details on setting these items, see “Setting the digital output signal.” OFF The player does not output the audio signals via the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL and COAXIAL) jacks. The influence of the digital circuit upon the analog circuit is minimal. Setting the digital output signal AUDIO SETUP AUDIO ATT: AUDIO DRC: DOWNMIX: DIGITAL OUT: DOLBY DIGITAL: T h OFF STANDARD DOLBY SURROUND ON D-PCM DTS: OFF D-PCM Select this when the player is connected to an audio component lacking a built-in Dolby Digital decoder. You can select whether the signals conform to Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) or not by making adjustments to the “DOWNMIX” item in “AUDIO SETUP” (page 74). DOLBY DIGITAL Select this when the player is connected to an audio component with a built-in Dolby Digital decoder. If the player is connected to an audio component lacking a built- in Dolby Digital decoder, do not set this. Otherwise, when you play the Dolby Digital sound track, a loud noise (or no sound) will come out from the speakers, affecting your ears or causing the speakers to be damaged. OFF Select this when the player is connected to an audio component lacking a built-in DTS decoder. Note, however, that the DTS signals contained in a CD are output even if “OFF” is selected. ON Select this when the player is connected to an audio component having a built-in DTS decoder. If the player is connected to an audio component lacking a built-in DTS decoder, do not set this. Otherwise, when you play the DTS sound track, a loud noise (or no sound) will come out from the speakers, affecting your ears or causing the speakers to be damaged. 76 Additional Information Troubleshooting If you experience any of the following difficulties while using the player, use this troubleshooting guide to help remedy the problem before requesting repairs. Should any problem persist, consult your nearest Sony dealer. The power is not turned on. , Check that the AC power cord is connected securely. There is no picture. , The connecting cords are not connected securely. , The connecting cords are damaged. , The player is not connected to the correct TV input jack (page 18). , The video input on the TV is not correctly set. Picture noise appears. , The disc is dirty or flawed. , If the picture output from your player goes through your VCR to get to your TV, the copy- protection signal applied to some DVD programs could affect picture quality. If you still experience problems even when you connect your player directly to your TV, please try connecting your player to your TV’s S video input (page 18). , You have selected “PROGRESSIVE” in “COMPONENT OUT” even though your TV cannot accept the signal in progressive format. In this case, set the VIDEO OUT SCAN SELECT switch on the back panel of the player to INTERLACE. Then set “COMPONENT OUT” to “INTERLACE” after you can see the TV screen correctly and reset VIDEO OUT SCAN SELECT to SELECTABLE. , Even if your TV is compatible with progressive format (480p) signals, the image may be affected when you set “COMPONENT OUT” to “PROGRESSIVE.” In this case, set “COMPONENT OUT” to “INTERLACE.” Even though you set the aspect ratio in “TV TYPE” of “SCREEN SETUP,” the picture does not fill the screen. , The aspect ratio of the disc is fixed on your DVD. There is no sound. , The connecting cord is not connected securely. , The connecting cord is damaged. , The player is connected to the wrong input jack on the amplifier (receiver) (page 22, 23, 24). , The amplifier (receiver) input is not correctly set to the player. , The player is in pause mode or in Slow-motion play mode. , The player is in fast forward or fast reverse mode. , If the audio signal does not come through the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks, check the audio settings (page 75). Sound is noisy. , The disc is dirty or flawed. , When playing a CD with DTS sound tracks, noise will come from the LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks (page 30). Sound distortion occurs. , Set “AUDIO ATT” in “AUDIO SETUP” to “ON” (page 74). Power Picture Sound Additional Information 77 The remote does not function. , There are obstacles between the remote and the player. , The distance between the remote and the player is too far. , The remote is not pointed at the remote sensor on the player. , The batteries in the remote are weak. The disc does not play. , There is no disc inside. , The disc is turned over. Insert the disc with the playback side facing down on the disc tray. , The disc is skewed. , The player cannot play CD-ROMs, etc. (page 6). , The region code on the DVD does not match the player. , Moisture has condensed inside the player. Remove the disc and leave the player turned on for about half an hour. Turn on the power again before playing the disc (page 3). The disc does not start playing from the beginning. , Program Play, Shuffle Play, Repeat Play, or A-B Repeat Play has been selected (page 34). Press CLEAR to cancel these functions before playing a disc. , Resume Play has been selected. During stop, press x on the player or the remote and then start playback (page 31). , The title, DVD, or PBC menu automatically appears on the TV screen. The player starts playing the disc automatically. , The DVD features an auto playback function. , “AUTO PLAY” in “CUSTOM SETUP” is set to “TIMER” (page 72). Playback stops automatically. , Some discs may contain an auto pause signal. While playing such a disc, the player stops playback at the auto pause signal. You cannot perform some functions such as Stop, Search, Slow-motion Play, Repeat Play, Shuffle Play, or Program Play. , Depending on the disc, you may not be able to do some of the operations above. See the operating manual that comes with the disc. Messages do not appear on the screen in the language you want. , In the Setup Display, select the desired language for the on-screen display in “OSD” under “LANGUAGE SETUP” (page 68). The language for the sound track cannot be changed. , Multilingual tracks are not recorded on the DVD being played. , The DVD prohibits the changing of the language for the sound track. The subtitle language cannot be changed. , Multilingual subtitles are not recorded on the DVD being played. , The DVD prohibits the changing of the subtitles. The subtitle cannot be turned off. , The DVD prohibits the subtitles being turned off. Operation continued www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 1-19 78 The angles cannot be changed. , Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD being played. The angle can only be changed when the “ANGLE” indicator lights up on the front panel display (page 9). , The DVD prohibits changing of the angles. The player does not operate properly. , When static electricity, etc., causes the player to operate abnormally, press POWER on the player to turn the player off and then on again. Nothing is displayed on the front panel display. , “DIMMER” in “CUSTOM SETUP” is set to “OFF.” Set “DIMMER” to “BRIGHT” or “DARK” (page 72). 5 numbers or letters are displayed on the screen and on the front panel display. , The self-diagnosis function was activated. (See the table on page 78.) The disc tray does not open and “LOCKED” appears on the front panel display. , Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. Self-diagnosis Function (When letters/numbers appear in the display) When the self-diagnosis function is activated to prevent the player from malfunctioning, a five-character service number (e.g., C 13 00) with a combination of a letter and four digits appears on the screen and the front panel display. In this case, check the following table. First three characters of the service number Cause and/or Corrective Action C 13 The disc is dirty. , Clean the disc with a soft cloth (page 7). C 31 The disc is not inserted correctly. , Re-insert the disc correctly. E XX (xx is a number) To prevent a malfunction, the CD/DVD player has performed the self-diagnosis function. , Contact your nearest Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility and give the 5-character service number. Example: E 61 10 C:13:00 Additional Information 79 Glossary Chapter (page 9) Sections of a picture or a music feature that are smaller than titles. A title is composed of several chapters. Depending on the disc, no chapters may be recorded. Dolby Digital (page 24, 75) Digital audio compression technology developed by Dolby Laboratories. This technology conforms to 5.1-channel surround sound. The rear channel is stereo and there is a discrete subwoofer channel in this format. Dolby Digital provides the same 5.1 discrete channels of high quality digital audio found in Dolby Digital cinema audio systems. Good channel separation is realized because all of the channel data is recorded discretely and little deterioration is realized because all channel data processing is digital. Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) (page 23) Audio signal processing technology that Dolby Laboratories developed for surround sound. When the input signal contains a surround component, the Pro Logic process outputs the front, center, and rear signals. The rear channel is monaural. DTS (page 24, 75) Digital audio compression technology that Digital Theater Systems, Inc. developed. This technology conforms to 5.1-channel surround sound. The rear channel is stereo and there is a discrete subwoofer channel in this format. DTS provides the same 5.1 discrete channels of high quality digital audio. Good channel separation is realized because all of the channel data is recorded discretely and little deterioration is realized because all channel data processing is digital. DVD (page 6) A disc that contains up to 8 hours of moving pictures even though its diameter is the same as a CD. The data capacity of a single-layer and single-sided DVD is 4.7 GB (Giga Byte), which is 7 times that of a CD. The data capacity of a double-layer and single-sided DVD is 8.5 GB, a single-layer and double- sided DVD is 9.4 GB, and double-layer and double-sided DVD is 17GB. The picture data uses the MPEG 2 format, one of the worldwide standards of digital compression technology. The picture data is compressed to about 1/40 (average) of its original size. The DVD also uses a variable rate coding technology that changes the data to be allocated according to the status of the picture. Audio information is recorded in Dolby Digital as well as in PCM, allowing you to enjoy a more real audio presence. Furthermore, various advanced functions such as the multi-angle, multilingual, and Parental Control functions are provided with the DVD. Film based software (page 71) DVDs can be classified as Film based or Video based software. Film based DVDs contain the same images (24 frames per second) that are shown at movie theaters. Interlace format (page 70) Interlace format shows every other line of an image as a single “field” and is the standard method for displaying images on television. The even number field shows the even numbered lines of an image, and the odd numbered field shows the odd numbered lines of an image. Index (CD)/Video Index (VIDEO CD) (page 9) A number that divides a track into sections to easily locate the point you want on a VIDEO CD or CD. Depending on the disc, no index may be recorded. continued 80 Parental Control (page 60) A function of the DVD used to limit playback of the disc according to the age of the user and the limitation level in each country. The limitation varies from disc to disc; when it is activated, or playback is completely prohibited, violent scenes are skipped or replaced with other scenes, etc. Progressive format (page 70) Compared to the Interlace format that alternately shows every other line of an image (field) to create one frame, the Progressive format shows the entire image at once as a single frame. This means that while the Interlace format can show 30 frames (60 fields) in one second, the Progressive format can show 60 frames in one second. The overall picture quality increases and still images, text, and horizontal lines appear sharper. This player is compatible with the 480 progressive format. Region Code (page 6) This system is used to protect the copyrights. A region number is allocated on each DVD player or DVD disc according to the sales region. Each region code is shown on the player as well as on the disc packaging. The player can play the discs that match its region code. The player can also play discs with the “ ” mark. Even when the region code is not shown on the DVD, the region limit may still be activated. Scene (page 9) On a VIDEO CD with PBC (playback control) functions, the menu screens, moving pictures and still pictures are divided into sections called “scenes.” Title (page 9) The longest section of a picture or music feature on a DVD, movie, etc., in video software, or the entire album in audio software. Track (page 9) Sections of a picture or a music feature on a VIDEO CD or CD (the length of a song). TV Virtual Surround (TVS) (page 51) Technology from Sony developed to produce surround sound for home use using just a stereo TV. Designed to work with the sound characteristics of your TV, this technology brings the excitement of surround sound to your home using nothing more than your stereo TV’s internal speakers. Furthermore, various TVS modes are available. For example, TVS WIDE uses just two speakers to create a virtual sound environment that makes you feel like you are surrounded by multiple speakers. Video based software (page 71) DVDs can be classified as Film based or Video based software. Television dramas or sit-coms are examples of Video based software and display images at 30 frames (or 60 fields) per second. ALL 82 Language Code List For details, see page 49, 54, 68. The language spellings conform to the ISO 639: 1988 (E/F) standard. Code Language Code Language Code Language Code Language 1027 Afar 1028 Abkhazian 1032 Afrikaans 1039 Amharic 1044 Arabic 1045 Assamese 1051 Aymara 1052 Azerbaijani 1053 Bashkir 1057 Byelorussian 1059 Bulgarian 1060 Bihari 1061 Bislama 1066 Bengali; Bangla 1067 Tibetan 1070 Breton 1079 Catalan 1093 Corsican 1097 Czech 1103 Welsh 1105 Danish 1109 German 1130 Bhutani 1142 Greek 1144 English 1145 Esperanto 1149 Spanish 1150 Estonian 1151 Basque 1157 Persian 1165 Finnish 1166 Fiji 1171 Faroese 1174 French 1181 Frisian 1183 Irish 1186 Scots Gaelic 1194 Galician 1196 Guarani 1203 Gujarati 1209 Hausa 1217 Hindi 1226 Croatian 1229 Hungarian 1233 Armenian 1235 Interlingua 1239 Interlingue 1245 Inupiak 1248 Indonesian 1253 Icelandic 1254 Italian 1257 Hebrew 1261 Japanese 1269 Yiddish 1283 Javanese 1287 Georgian 1297 Kazakh 1298 Greenlandic 1299 Cambodian 1300 Kannada 1301 Korean 1305 Kashmiri 1307 Kurdish 1311 Kirghiz 1313 Latin 1326 Lingala 1327 Laothian 1332 Lithuanian 1334 Latvian; Lettish 1345 Malagasy 1347 Maori 1349 Macedonian 1350 Malayalam 1352 Mongolian 1353 Moldavian 1356 Marathi 1357 Malay 1358 Maltese 1363 Burmese 1365 Nauru 1369 Nepali 1376 Dutch 1379 Norwegian 1393 Occitan 1403 (Afan)Oromo 1408 Oriya 1417 Punjabi 1428 Polish 1435 Pashto; Pushto 1436 Portuguese 1463 Quechua 1481 Rhaeto- Romance 1482 Kirundi 1483 Romanian 1489 Russian 1491 Kinyarwanda 1495 Sanskrit 1498 Sindhi 1501 Sangho 1502 Serbo-Croatian 1503 Singhalese 1505 Slovak 1506 Slovenian 1507 Samoan 1508 Shona 1509 Somali 1511 Albanian 1512 Serbian 1513 Siswati 1514 Sesotho 1515 Sundanese 1516 Swedish 1517 Swahili 1521 Tamil 1525 Telugu 1527 Tajik 1528 Thai 1529 Tigrinya 1531 Turkmen 1532 Tagalog 1534 Setswana 1535 Tonga 1538 Turkish 1539 Tsonga 1540 Tatar 1543 Twi 1557 Ukrainian 1564 Urdu 1572 Uzbek 1581 Vietnamese 1587 Volapük 1613 Wolof 1632 Xhosa 1665 Yoruba 1684 Chinese 1697 Zulu 1703 Not specified www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 1-20 1-20 E Additional Information 83 List of Setup Display Items The default settings are underlined. LANGUAGE SETUP (page 68) SCREEN SETUP (page 69) OSD ENGLISH FRENCH SPANISH PORTUGUESE DVD MENU ENGLISH FRENCH SPANISH PORTUGUESE GERMAN ITALIAN DUTCH CHINESE JAPANESE DANISH SWEDISH FINNISH NORWEGIAN RUSSIAN OTHERS t AUDIO ORIGINAL (All other selections are the same as the DVD MENU language.) SUBTITLE AUDIO FOLLOW (All other selections are the same as the DVD MENU language.) TV TYPE 4:3 LETTER BOX 4:3 PAN SCAN 16:9 SCREEN SAVER ON OFF BACKGROUND JACKET PICTURE GRAPHICS BLUE BLACK COMPONENT OUT INTERLACE PROGRESSIVE MODE AUTO VIDEO continued 84 CUSTOM SETUP (page 72) AUDIO SETUP (page 74) AUTO PLAY OFF TIMER DEMO1 DEMO2 DIMMER BRIGHT DARK OFF PAUSE MODE AUTO FRAME PARENTAL CONTROL t PLAYBACK MEMORY ON OFF TRACK SELECTION OFF AUTO AUDIO ATT OFF ON AUDIO DRC STANDARD TV MODE WIDE RANGE DOWNMIX DOLBY SURROUND NORMAL DIGITAL OUT ON DOLBY DIGITAL D-PCM DOLBY DIGITAL DTS OFF ON OFF www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 2-1 Note: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given. 2-1. CASE REMOVAL 2-3. MB-100 BOARD REMOVAL 2-2. AV-58 BOARD REMOVAL 2-4. TRAY COVER REMOVAL SECTION 2 DISASSEMBLY DVP-NS700P 1 Three tapping screws 4 Case 2 Tapping screw 3 Tapping screw 3 Six screws (B3) 4 AV-58 board 2 Connector (CN202) 1 Two flexible flat cables (FMAV-003: CN102/ FMA-029: CN203) 3 Five screws (B3) 4 MB-100 board 2 Connector (CN101) 1 Three flexible flat cables (FMO-001: CN201/ FMO-002: CN202/ FMM-035: CN402) 2 Pull the tray in the direction of arrow B. 3 Two claws 4 Tray cover 1 Insert a tapering driver into the aperture of the unit bottom, and move the lever of chuck cam in the direction of arrow A. B A www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 2-2 2-5. FRONT PANEL REMOVAL 2-7. RM-85 BOARD REMOVAL 2-6. POWER BLOCK REMOVAL 2-8. MECHANISM DECK REMOVAL 3 Two claws 5 Front panel 2 Claw 4 Claw 1 Connector (CN402) 1 Connector (CN101) 2 Connector (CN201) 3 Two screws (WHD B3) 5 Joint (POWER) 4 Two screws (WHD B3) 6 Power block 1 Flexible flat cables (FIR-003: CN501) 2 Screw (B3) 3 RM-85 board 2 Three screws (B3) 3 Mechanism deck 1 Three flexible flat cables (FMO-001: CN201/ FMO-002: CN202/ FMM-035: CN402) www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 2-3 2-9. IF-83 BOARD REMOVAL 2-10. TRAY REMOVAL 2-11. LOADING MOTOR (M001), MS-81 BOARD REMOVAL 2-12. OPTICAL PICK-UP REMOVAL 1 Flexible flat cable (FIR-003: CN406) 6 IF-83 board 5 Three screws (B3) 3 Two screws (B3) 4 Multi pillar 2 Connector (CN101) 2 Connector (CN201) 1 Move the lever of chuck cam in the direction of arrow A. 3 Claw 4 Tray 3 Claw A 2 4 Loading motor (M001), MS-81 board 3 Two claws 1 BELT 2 Two screws (P2.6 x 4) 2 Insulator 2 Insulator 2 Insulator 1 Insulator screw 1 Insulator screw 3 Optical pick-up 1 Insulator screw www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 2-4 DC motor (loading) 1-541-632-11 2-13. INTERNAL VIEWS Optical pick-up (KHM-240AAA/J1RP) 8-820-144-06 DC motor (loading) 1-541-632-11 www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 2-5 2-5 E 2-14. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION AV-58 (AUDIO/VIDEO OUT) MB-100 (SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO) MS-81 (LOADING) RM-85 (REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER) Power Block (HS13S0U) (SWITCHING REGULATOR) IF-83 (INTERFACE CONTROL) www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com DVP-NS700P IC202 IC302 IC503 IC303 IC101 IC802 IC107 IC404 IC504, 505 IC601 IC102 J101 (1/2) J101 (2/2) J103 J102 IC401 BASE UNIT KHM-240AAA/J1RP MS-81 BOARD (SEE PAGE 4-6) MB-100 BOARD (SEE PAGE 4-11 to 4-30) AV-58 BOARD (SEE PAGE 4-35 to 4-38) IF-83 BOARD (SEE PAGE 4-41) RM-85 BOARD (SEE PAGE 4-6) OPTICAL DEVICE DVD/CD PD IC RF DVD/CD RF AMP, DIGITAL SERVO RF+ ARP, SERVO DSP FOCUS COIL TRACKING COIL FOCUS/TRACKING COIL DRIVE, SPINDLE/SLED/ LOADING MOTOR DRIVE M M M SPINDLE MOTOR SLED MOTOR M001 LOADING MOTOR FUNCTION KEY VIDEO OUT SCAN SELECT SWITCH ND401 FLUORESCENT INDICATOR TUBE IF CON P CON SERIAL BUS EEPROM ROM PARALLEL BUS CDDOUT, CDDATA, CDBCK, CDLRCK SDI 0 – 7 AV DECODER SPDIF, ACH12, ACH34, ACH56, BCK, LRCK 16M DRAM 16M SDRAM BNR V, Y, C Y, Cb, Cr VIDEO BUFFER IC103 VIDEO SELECTOR IC901 GATE ARRAY SPDIF IC204 AUDIO D/A CONVERTER IC201 AUDIO AMP IC501 REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER EVER+3.3V +11V +5V +3.3V +1.8V SW+3.3V +5V SW+11V EVER+11V EVER–11V INLIMIT SENSOR CHUCK/TRAY DETECT HS13S0U BOARD (SEE PAGE 4-45) SWITCHING REG AC IN IC003 16M SDRAM PDO0 – 7 PD0 – 7 Y, Cb, Cr Y, Cb, Cr Y, Cb, Cr Y0 – 7 CB0 – 7 CR0 – 7 PDI0 – 7 05 IC801 AUDIO DSP PB/CB COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Y PR/CR LINE OUT VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 2 1 S VIDEO OUT L R LINE OUT AUDIO 2 L R AUDIO 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL J201 D101 F101 SW101 POWER AI+5V EVER+3.3V AU+11V SW–11V REG IC103 SYSTEM CONTROL PUSH ENTER SHUTTLE/ CURSOR STICK S001 IC104 VIDEO BUFFER IC902 VIDEO ENCODER IC001 I/P CONVERTER AU+5V +5V REG –5V REG IC108 or FLASH or SECTION 3 BLOCK DIAGRAMS 3-1 3-2 3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM w w w . x i a o y u 1 6 3 . c o m Q Q 3 7 6 3 1 5 1 5 0 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 T E L 1 3 9 4 2 2 9 6 5 1 3 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com DVP-NS700P 3-3 3-4 3-2. RF/SERVO BLOCK DIAGRAM 2 19 25 27 59 42 41 36 38 44 172 13 15 21 33 37 14 ı 11 7 ı 10 45 ı 48 32 ı 29 136 135 137 185 144 197 196 15 ı 18 37 36 21 22 48 1 47 46 204 205 202 203 35 34 27 28 7 10 25 24 3 4 45 5 140 166 167 200 156 24 22 198 199 159 161 MB-100 BOARD (1/5) (SEE PAGE 4-11, 13, 19) BASE UNIT KHM-240AAA/J1RP OPTICAL DEVICE 24 25 17 16 22 20 13 8 12 4 3 15 23 18 26 2 1 Q201 DVD LD DRIVE IC202 IC302 DVD/CD PD IC DVD/CD LD MODULE CN201 DVD/CD RF AMP, DIGITAL SERVO RF IN A – D E – H A2 – D2 VC DVDPD CDPD DVDLD SIGO FE TE PI DFT MON GIO5/PGIN MIRR TZC SRD SWD SCLK SDEN SERVO DSP ADC1 ADC0 ADC2 DFCTI ADC7 POM 2, 3 142 143 ADC5, 6 MIRR TZC ADC4 SIGNAL PROCESSOR (SEE PAGE 3-5) SYSTEM CONTROL (SEE PAGE 3-7) XDSPRST HCS HINT MDSO MDPO 176 177 GIO9/FGREF GIO10/FGIN GIO1/INT3 PWM2 PWM0, 1 POM 0, 1 GIO0/INT2 SPINDLE MOTOR DRIVE FOCUS COIL DRIVE TRACKING COIL DRIVE LOADING MOTOR DRIVE SLED MOTOR DRIVE 7 1 ı 4 9 8 1 5 4 IC401 5 2 4 1 2 CN402 CN001 LDM± CKSW1 OCSW1 INLIMIT SENSOR TRACKING COIL FOCUS COIL M001 LOADING MOTOR M M M MS-81 BOARD (SEE PAGE 4-6) SLED MOTOR SPINDLE MOTOR CN202 39 VCI 19 39 20 22 16 17 168 GIO2/INT4 05 CHUCK/TRAY DETECT S001 (1/2) RF A – D E – H VC PD 24 10 LEDSEL0 SW DVD LD 26 6 Q202 CD LD DRIVE CDLD CD LD VR SLA±, SLB± SPM± INLIM TRK± 139 ADC3 FCS± PS TSD-M 40 42 43 VREF +3.3V LDON 173 ı 175 180 GIO6/SDI GIO7/SDO GIO8/SCK GIO13 XSDPIT XSDPCS XRST XDRVMUTE OCSW1 RF+ CKSW1 XLDON FE TE PI SSDFCTI SS MON MDSO, MDPO SPMUTE SLDA, SLDB LMP, LMM TSD LMCTL TDRV± FDRV± SPFG SLE IC302 1.6 Vp-p (66 MHz) w w w . x i a o y u 1 6 3 . c o m Q Q 3 7 6 3 1 5 1 5 0 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 T E L 1 3 9 4 2 2 9 6 5 1 3 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 4-32 DVP-NS700P • Waveforms 1 IC102 ed 2.4 Vp-p (H) 2 IC102 ea 1.8 Vp-p (H) 3 IC102 wl 2.0 Vp-p (H) 4 IC102 wf 2.0 Vp-p (H) 5 IC102 ws 1.3 Vp-p (H) 6 IC102 w; 1.3 Vp-p (H) 7 IC104 qg 2.2 Vp-p (H) 8 IC104 qd 1.6 Vp-p (H) 9 IC104 qa 1.6 Vp-p (H) w w w . x i a o y u 1 6 3 . c o m Q Q 3 7 6 3 1 5 1 5 0 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 T E L 1 3 9 4 2 2 9 6 5 1 3 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com DVP-NS700P 4-33 4-34 AUDIO/VIDEO OUT AV-58 AV-58 (AUDIO/VIDEO OUT) PRINTED WIRING BOARD – Ref. No.: AV-58 board; 1,000 series – There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram. AV-58 BOARD CN102 C-10 CN202 B-2 CN203 C-11 D101 A-9 D102 A-9 D103 A-8 D104 A-8 D201 B-12 D202 B-11 D205 A-2 IC101 B-4 IC102 B-9 IC103 B-7 IC104 B-5 IC201 B-10 IC203 C-13 IC204 A-12 Q101 C-9 Q102 C-9 Q103 C-9 Q104 C-10 Q105 C-10 Q106 B-8 Q107 B-8 Q201 B-1 Q202 C-11 Q203 A-2 Q204 C-12 Q205 B-11 Q207 B-10 Q208 B-10 Q211 B-13 Q216 B-2 AV-58 (AUDIO/VIDEO OUT) MB-100 (SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO) MS-81 (LOADING) RM-85 (REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER) Power Block (HS13S0U) (SWITCHING REGULATOR) IF-83 (INTERFACE CONTROL) w w w . x i a o y u 1 6 3 . c o m Q Q 3 7 6 3 1 5 1 5 0 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 T E L 1 3 9 4 2 2 9 6 5 1 3 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com DVP-NS700P 4-35 4-36 VIDEO BUFFER AV-58 (1/2) AV-58 (VIDEO BUFFER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-33 for printed wiring board, and see page 4-32 for waveforms. – Ref. No.: AV-58 board; 1,000 series – B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B- B- B- B- B- B- B- B- B- B- B- B- B- B- B- B- B- B- NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY 0.6 -5 0.1 0.1 0.6 4.9 -5 -5 0 0.5 0.5 4.9 0.5 2 3 0.6 1 -5 4 0.6 3.3 5 1.2 6 0.6 1.2 0.5 3.3 0.6 4.9 4.9 0 -5 -10.5 3.3 5 0 5.1 -0.3 5 -0.3 -0 3.4 -5 -0.1 3.4 -5 -0.1 -0.1 0.6 5 1.1 1.1 1.1 0.6 0.3 5 5 5 0.1 0 -5 7 9 8 0.5 0.5 -0.1 -5 -5 -5 0.6 1.1 1.1 UN2111-TX Q105 10k R129 0.1u C114 68 R134 68 R130 0.1u C112 68 R133 100uH L101 JL117 68 R131 JL119 16V 47u C113 3300 R121 JL120 UN2213-TX Q104 75 R126 75 R127 75 R128 VMUTE JL116 IC101 L79M05TLL-SONY-TL GND 1 IN 2 OUT 3 0.047u C109 16V 47u C102 JL122 JL123 JL124 2SA1162-YG-TE85L Q101 2SA1162-YG-TE85L Q102 2SA1162-YG-TE85L Q103 47u C110 16V 47u C111 16V P_GND 1L 2L 2R 1R 0 R139 0 R140 LA73050-TLM IC102 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 21 20 V C Y WIDE Y/G CB/R CR/B 1k R157 1k R158 1k R159 S101 16V 47u C106 0 R113 16V 47u C119 0.01u C118 10k R107 0 R111 47k R141 0 R114 0.01u C103 47k R153 TC74HC4053AF(EL) IC103 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 LA7104M-TLM IC104 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 UN2213-TX Q107 16V 47u C115 16V 47u C104 0 R155 16V 47u C108 UN2113-TX Q106 16V 47u C107 0.01u C105 10k R108 47k R135 0 R156 0.01u C120 16V 47u C121 3300 R115 0 R112 22k R154 10k R109 0.01u C101 9P CN102 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10k R101 10k R102 10k R103 1k R104 1k R105 1k R106 0 R160 J101 2 1V 5 1L 3 VGND 1 2V 9 RGND 7 2R 8 1R 6 LGND 4 2L J102 1 PR/R-Y 2 GND1 3 PB/B-Y 4 Y 5 GND2 200 R163 200 R164 200 R165 220 R166 220 R167 220 R168 16V 47u C126 Y C G G C G G Y J103 1CGND 7 8 1YGND 1C 5 6 1Y 3 2CGND 4 2YGND 1 2C 2 2Y 9 GND 10 S 0 R171 68 R169 68 R170 0 R172 HZM6.8ZWA1TL D101 HZM6.8ZWA1TL D102 HZM6.8ZWA1TL D103 HZM6.8ZWA1TL D104 0 R162 AI+5V SW-11V D_GND IPSW 1 A VIDEO_IN DCCNT1 GND C_IN MUTE1 Y_IN NC(DCCNT2) NC(GND) Y_IN(NC) DCCNT2 GND Cb_IN MUTE2 Cr_IN +5V VIDEO_OUT GND C_OUT NC Y_OUT -5V NC +5V(NC) Y_OUT GND Cb_OUT Cr_OUT -5V NC -5V NC NC NC NC NC -5V Y OUT C X_COM DR CTL 0Z +5V 1Z MUTE2 Z_COM A Y_COM NFB1 NFB3 -5V MUTE1 0X GND Y IN B VEE Cr OUT Cb OUT VCC 1Y Cr IN NFB2 GND 0Y -5V INH 1X Cb IN GND Y +5V Cb GND Cr -5V GND DSEL R R VIDEO 2 L AUDIO 2 AUDIO 1 L VIDEO 1 LINE OUT S VIDEO OUT C Y r b C COMPONENT VIDEO OUT 1 2 IC101 -5V REG IC103 VIDEO SELECTOR IC104 VIDEO BUFFER IC102 VIDEO BUFFER SIGNAL VIDEO SIGNAL CHROMA PB Y AUDIO SIGNAL PATH Y/CHROMA AV-58 BOARD (2/2) (SEE PAGE 4-28) MB-100 BOARD (9/10) CN902 BUFFER BUFFER BUFFER SIDE SWITCH SIDE SWITCH 13 2 4 F 19 12 5 G K 11 8 7 6 E 05 B H AV-58 BOARD (1/2) I 16 9 17 3 D 18 C 15 10 J 14 INTERLACE PROGRESSIVE SELECTABLE SCAN SELECT I/P SWITCH I/P SWITCH w w w . x i a o y u 1 6 3 . c o m Q Q 3 7 6 3 1 5 1 5 0 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 T E L 1 3 9 4 2 2 9 6 5 1 3 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com DVP-NS700P 4-37 4-38 AUDIO AMP AV-58 (2/2) AV-58 (AUDIO AMP) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-33 for printed wiring board. – Ref. No.: AV-58 board; 1,000 series – B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B- B- B- B- B+ B- B+ D:DVD PLAY C:CD PLAY NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY 1.4 10.9 1.4 0 0 1.4 1.4 -8.6 0 0 D0.8/ C-8.6 D0.8/ C-8.6 D10.2/C-8.6 10.2 D9.5/C10.2 D0/C10.2 D6.2/C0 D6.2/ C0 D0.6/ C3.1 10.9 11 10.2 -9.2 -9.3 -8.7 -9.3 -10.5 -10 5 10.9 5 2.5 1.8 0 5 EXCEPT AEP,UK,RUS J201 16V 47u C227 JL203 JL204 16V 47u C228 JL202 GP1FA550TZ IC204 D IN 1 VCC 2 GND 3 JL201 2SC2712-YG-TE85L Q211 68 R251 1k R253 1k R256 220 R249 1k R254 16V 47u C229 JL221 JL224 JL223 JL222 JL225 JL226 JL228 JL215 JL210 JL209 JL211 JL214 JL212 JL216 JL207 JL213 JL205 10k R252 SW-11V AI+5V 0 R279 D_GND 16V 47u C210 2SD1938(F)- T(TX).SO Q208 2L 5600 R212 5600 R205 180p C203 470 R227 DAN202K-T-146 D201 2200 R209 50V 1u C209 2200 R207 180p C206 0.01u C222 47k R230 4700 R203 4700 R201 47k R225 4700 R213 IC203 NJM78L05UA-TE1 OUT 1 GND 2 IN 3 16V 47u C224 560p C202 UN2213-TX Q202 2200 R208 470 R226 100k R238 DTC124TKA-T146 Q204 5600 R211 2SB709A-QRS-TX Q205 16V 47u C211 0.01u C223 2200 R210 470 R243 DAP202K-T-146 D202 4700 R202 4700 R234 1R 4700 R204 10k R224 180p C205 470 R242 4700 R235 2R BA4558F-E2 IC201 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10k R228 180p C204 470 R241 47k R229 2SD1938(F)- T(TX).SO Q207 1L 5600 R206 10k R222 560p C201 470 R240 0.01u C208 0.01u C207 CB/R CR/B D_GND Y/G WIDE V C Y JL230 JL206 JL236 JL231 JL232 JL234 JL237 JL235 330u 6.3V C242 220k R219 2SC2712- YG-TE85L Q203 1SS355TE-17 D205 2SB710-RTX Q201 10k R217 5600 R216 100k R218 7P CN202 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2SB709A-QRS-TX Q216 470 R220 10k R221 16V 47u C244 CN203 25P 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 16V 220u C231 1 A P_GND JL233 IPSW VMUTE COAXIAL GND A_MUTE AI+5V SW-11V EVER+3.3V V_MUTE AU+11V Y/CHROMA SIGNAL VIDEO SIGNAL Y SIGNAL PATH PB AUDIO CHROMA 13 2 4 F 12 5 G 11 8 7 6 E 05 B H AV-58 BOARD (2/2) I 16 9 3 D C 15 10 J 14 MB-100 BOARD (8/10) CN801 (SEE PAGE 4-26) AV-58 BOARD (1/2) AV-58 BOARD (1/2) IF-83 BOARD (SEE PAGE 4-42) CN404 AV-58 BOARD (1/2,2/2) IC201 AUDIO AMP +5V REG IC203 MUTE MUTE BUFFER OPTICAL DIGITAL IC204 OUTPUT OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT B+ SWITCH Q203,216 B- SWITCH Q202,204,205 MUTE DRIVE AV-58 BOARD (1/2) SPDIF P_GND_2CH ALT+ V ALT- Cr/B GND Y GND GND(EUROVY) P_GND_SPDIF Y/G MAMUTE C ART+ Cb/R ART- GND AU+5V LMUTE IPSW(DISKEXT) WIDE GND(RGBSEL) GND(RMUTE) GND w w w . x i a o y u 1 6 3 . c o m Q Q 3 7 6 3 1 5 1 5 0 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 T E L 1 3 9 4 2 2 9 6 5 1 3 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com DVP-NS700P 4-39 4-40 INTERFACE CONTROL IF-83 IF-83 (INTERFACE CONTROL) PRINTED WIRING BOARD – Ref. No.: IF-83 board; 1,000 series – There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram. IF-83 BOARD CN401 C-13 CN402 E-2 CN403 E-3 CN405 E-2 CN406 E-13 D403 E-11 D404 E-11 D405 E-11 D406 E-11 D408 E-2 D409 E-2 D412 E-11 D414 E-13 D415 E-12 IC403 B-11 IC404 D-9 IC405 C-9 Q401 E-12 Q402 E-12 Q404 C-13 Q405 C-12 AV-58 (AUDIO/VIDEO OUT) MB-100 (SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO) MS-81 (LOADING) RM-85 (REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER) Power Block (HS13S0U) (SWITCHING REGULATOR) IF-83 (INTERFACE CONTROL) w w w . x i a o y u 1 6 3 . c o m Q Q 3 7 6 3 1 5 1 5 0 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 T E L 1 3 9 4 2 2 9 6 5 1 3 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com DVP-NS700P 4-41 4-42 • Waveforms 1 IC404 3 3.4 Vp-p (8 MHz) 2 ND401 1, 2 8 Vp-p (200 kHz) 3 T401 3 20 Vp-p (409 kHz) IF-83 (IF CON) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM – Ref. No.: IF-83 board; 1,000 series – IF CON IF-83 The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified. Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié. B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B- B- B- B- B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B- B- B+ NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY :US,CND 1.3 -27.5 1.5 0 0 3.4 3.4 3.3 3.4 3.4 3.3 3.2 0 3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.2 -27.5 -27.5 -27.5 -14.4 -14.4 -17.1 -17.1 -22.3 -22.3 -24.9 -24.9 -24.9 -19.7 -19.7 -24.9 -12 -0.2 -25.3 -25.3 -25.3 -25.2 -25.2 -25.2 -25.2 -25.2 -25.2 -25.2 -25.2 3.4 3 -25.3 -27.7 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.4 3.3 3.4 3.4 3.4 2.6 3.4 -0.2 -10.8 -10.5 -0.2 -10.6 3.4 3.4 -10.6 -10.5 -9.8 3.2 3.4 3.4 1.8 1 -24.9 3 2 3.3 0 MA113-(TX) D403 C431 0.1u L401 47uH C417 4700p D405 MA113-(TX) 2SC5053T100Q Q402 Q401 2SC5053T100Q 5600 R429 0.1u C422 50V 22u C425 MA113-(TX) D404 MA113-(TX) D406 TMP86CK74F-3CB8 IC404 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 220 R486 D414 SLR-342DCT32 220 R487 D415 SLR-342DCT32 100 R474 100 R481 100 R485 100 R484 100 R483 100 R482 2700 R421 10k R433 8200 R422 10k R434 3900 R431 10k R435 8200 R428 0.01u C420 100 R425 X401 8MHz 10k R450 100 R420 0.001u C421 100 R444 100k R446 13P CN401 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 16V 100u C411 10k R473 JL411 JL413 JL412 JL410 JL415 JL414 JL409 JL408 JL407 3900 R427 2700 R430 120 R437 10k R440 4700 R401 BZ401 MA8062-L-TX D412 0.01u C409 0.01u C412 S-80830ANUP-EDT-T2 IC405 1 2 3 10k R455 10k R470 10k R448 10k R449 S404 S401 0.01u C428 PS402 PS401 0.01u C432 0.01u C427 JL436 JL445 JL446 JL448 JL447 JL449 JL450 JL451 0.01u C407 16V 100u C429 0.01u C414 0.01u C416 0.01u C401 JL453 JL454 JL456 JL455 JL457 S403 FB401 S408 S409 S410 S407 S405 S406 S412 S411 10P CN405 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 JL403 JL402 25V 220u C419 390p C430 5600 R413 390p C436 2700 R414 0.01u C437 100k R402 JL416 10k R418 2SD1766-T100-QR Q404 1800 R415 UN2111-TX Q405 1800 R416 22k R490 T401 1 8 7 6 9 2 3 4 5 S402 22k R423 15P CN403 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 33 R424 1 A JL458 0.1u C423 BA18BC0FP-E2 IC403 VIN 1 GND 2 VOUT 3 16V 22u C426 7P CN404 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 JL459 JL438 JL463 JL461 JL460 JL462 0 R460 10k R495 HZM6.8ZWA1TL D409 JL418 JL469 JL417 JL401 7P CN402 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 JL470 10k R494 HZM6.8ZWA1TL D408 JL405 JL406 0.01u C438 0.01u C439 JL466 CN406 5P 1 2 3 4 5 JL464 JL465 JL468 JL467 SEG7 SEG8 SEG3 SEG4 SEG5 SEG6 DIG12 DIG11 DIG10 DIG9 DIG8 DIG7 DIG6 DIG5 DIG4 DIG3 DIG2 DIG1 SEG18 SEG17 SEG16 SEG15 SEG14 SEG13 SEG12 SEG11 SEG10 SEG9 SEG8 SEG7 SEG6 SEG5 SEG4 SEG3 SEG2 SEG1 SEG9 SEG10 SEG17 SEG16 SEG15 SEG14 SEG11 SEG12 SEG13 SEG18 DIG5 DIG6 DIG7 DIG8 DIG9 DIG10 DIG11 DIG12 SEG2 SEG1 DIG4 DIG3 DIG2 DIG1 BNR BNR SURROUND VCC GND VOUT F1 F1 G1 G2 G3 G4 G6 G5 G7 G8 G10 G11 G9 G12 P18 P17 P16 P15 P13 P14 P11 P12 P10 P9 P8 P6 P7 P4 P5 P3 P2 P1 F2 F2 XIFCS SC0 SOO SIO XIFBUSY XFRRST 3.3V_MNT GND IFRST P-CONT P-DET D_GND D_GND SW+3.3V EVER+3.3V +5V +11(AUDIO) DISPLAY DVD MENU RETURN TITLE +11V MGND +1.8V GND +5V GND +3.3V PCONT 3.3V_MNT XFRRST IFBUSY XIFCS SIO SOO SC0 GND DIG1 DIG2 DIG3 DIG4 DIG5 DIG6 DIG7 DIG8 DIG9 DIG10 DIG11 DIG12 SEG16 SEG15 SEG14 SEG13 SEG12 SEG11 SEG10 SEG9 SEG8 SEG7 SEG6 SEG5 SEG4 SEG3 SEG2 SEG1 SEG17 SEG18 N.C N.C CURSOR DISPLAY PLAY BNRKEY AN6 AVSS O/C PONCHK VREF VKK AN11 SEL1 SEL0 PCONT STATUS BUSY VSS XIN XOUT VDD /FRRST IR /RST N.C SELF_CHECK /STOP SO SI /SC AN9 /CS AN8 /VMUTE JOGCCW BUZ PDET JOGCW SEL2 TEST /AMUTE MULT BNR VCC N.C N.C VES JOG LED N.C M_GND M_GND SW+11V SW+11V EVER-11V 1.0A 1.0A 13 2 4 F L 12 5 G K 11 8 7 6 E 05 B H IF-83 BOARD I 16 9 17 3 D C 15 M 10 J 14 44 58 ND401 8 57 56 6 2 12 43 46 FLUORESCENT INDICATOR TUBE 9 47 41 14 16 7 51 45 62 61 54 5 1 50 55 15 11 10 48 42 49 13 52 53 IC403 +1.8V REG IF CON IC404 IC405 RESET (SEE PAGE 4-46) HS13S0U BOARD CN201 (BUZZER) CN101 (SEE PAGE 4-24) MB-100 BOARD (7/10) (JIG) DOWNLOAD SURROUND (AMBER) (AMBER) PUSH ENTER CURSOR STICK DC/DC CONVERTER Q401,402 CONVERTER DC/DC SWITCH B- SWITCH GND AU+11V AI+5V EVER+3.3V A_MUTE SW-11V V_MUTE AV-58 BOARD (2/2) (SEE PAGE 4-38) CN202 JOG_CCW JOG_CW LED-A LED-C E+3.3V GND AN5 GND GND EVER3.3V PROG SIRCS RM-85 BOARD (SEE PAGE 4-6) CN501 w w w . x i a o y u 1 6 3 . c o m Q Q 3 7 6 3 1 5 1 5 0 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 T E L 1 3 9 4 2 2 9 6 5 1 3 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com DVP-NS700P 4-43 4-44 SWITCHING REGULATOR HS13S0U HS13S0U (SWITCHING REGULATOR) PRINTED WIRING BOARD – Ref. No.: HS13S0U board; 5,000 series – HS13S0U BOARD CN101 B-3 CN201 A-1 D101 A-3 D104 A-2 D105 A-2 D211 B-2 D212 A-1 D221 A-2 D311 A-2 D413 A-2 D511 A-2 D611 A-2 D621 B-1 IC301 B-2 IC411 A-1 Q101 A-3 Q102 A-2 Q211 B-1 Q311 A-1 Q411 A-2 Q611 A-1 Q621 B-1 Q622 B-1 Q712 A-1 There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram. A B 3 2 1 05 11 1-468-583- HS13S0U BOARD SW101 POWER (ON/STANDBY) A K A AV-58 (AUDIO/VIDEO OUT) MB-100 (SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO) MS-81 (LOADING) RM-85 (REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER) Power Block (HS13S0U) (SWITCHING REGULATOR) IF-83 (INTERFACE CONTROL) w w w . x i a o y u 1 6 3 . c o m Q Q 3 7 6 3 1 5 1 5 0 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 T E L 1 3 9 4 2 2 9 6 5 1 3 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com DVP-NS700P 4-45 4-46 E HS13S0U (SWITCHING REGULATOR) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM – Ref. No.: HS13S0U board; 5,000 series – The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified. Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié. SWITCHING REGULATOR HS13S0U B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B+ B– B– B– 11 1 3.4 4.2 3.6 0 0 2.6 0.7 3.4 3.4 4 2.5 5.2 4 3.5 5.1 5.9 5.2 11 2.5 0.2 2.4 8.2 0.2 4.1 4.1 5.1 2.4 168.7 NO MARK: E-E MODE B+ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 P-DET P-CONT EVER–11V M_GND M_GND SW+11V SW+11V SW+3.3V D_GND D_GND EVER+3.3V +5V +11 (AUDIO) CN201 13P C314 22uF 50V + C711 47uF 35V + R311 1k R711 1.8k R533 47k Q712 DTC143ES POWER CONTROL Q622 DTC143ES Q621 2SC1740S Q611 2SD1768S B+ SWITCH Q311 2SD1768S B+ SWITCH R211 1.5k R623 10k R622 120 D621 SPR-325MVW D621 (ON/STANDBY) Q621, 622 LED DRIVE R621 220 R614 10k R314 10k P611 1A 60V P311 1A 60V R213 1k R613 270 1/2W R313 330 R212 10k Q211 2SJ525 B+ SWITCH C413 47uF 35V + C513 47uF 35V + C414 0.01uF 50V R413 1.8k R412 680 R411 470 Q411 2SD1768S +3.3V REG C213 47uF 35V + C211 150uF 35V + C313 47uF 35V + IC411 AN1431T D413 D1N60 D611 D1NS4 D311 D1NS4 D211 D2S4M C223 47uF 35V + L511 100uH R531 1k L211 39uH C613 47uF 35V + C611 330uF 35V + C311 330uF 35V + L221 100uH D212 RD33FB2 L311 39uH L611 39uH C221 100uF 35V + C511 100uF 35V + R303 1k PC101 PS2501 D105 1SS270A R304 680 R306 1.5k C301 2.2uF 50V + IC301 AN1431T T101 R114 270 R113 680 D104 HZS2C3-TE C116 0.01uF 50V C115 0.033uF 50V C117 0.0033uF 50V C150 470pF 1kV R116 220 R110 1k Q102 2SC3377 SWITCH Q101 2SK2750 SWITCH R115 33k R105 270k 1/2W R106 270k 1/2W L150 120/160 D101 S1WBA60 L101 18mH SW101 C107 2200pF 250V C101 0.1uF 250V FG201 C110 120uF 200V CN101 2P F101 2A 125V HS13S0U BOARD 1 A B C D E 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D221 D1NS4 D511 D1NS4 R301 68 + 05 IC411 SHUNT REG IC301 SHUNT REG POWER AC IN IF-83 BOARD CN401 (SEE PAGE 4-41) S 1 2 S w w w . x i a o y u 1 6 3 . c o m Q Q 3 7 6 3 1 5 1 5 0 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 T E L 1 3 9 4 2 2 9 6 5 1 3 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 5-1 SECTION 5 IC PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION DVP-NS700P Pin No. Pin name I/O Function 39 SCL O I2C bus serial clock output 40 TRM+/XKRRST - Not used 41 EUROV/Y/CLAPSW1 O EURO V/Y select signal output/Mute signal output to video buffer 42 DISCEXT/CLPSW0 O Line input select signal output (DISC: “H”, EXT: “ L”) 43 MD0 I Input of mode select 0 (fixed at “ H”) 44 MD1 I Input of mode select 1 (fixed at “ L”) 45 MD2 I Input of mode select 2 (fixed at “ L”) 46 DREQ0 I Input of DMA-REQ 0 from AV DEC 47 DACK0 O Output of DMA-ACK 0 to AV DEC 48 XDRVMUTE O Drive mute signal output 49 DREQ1 I Input of DMA-REQ 1 from AV DEC 50 DACK1 O Output of DMA-ACK 1 to AV DEC 51 XIFCS O Chip select signal to IF CON 52 VSS - Ground 53 X1 O Clock output (16.5 MHz) 54 X0 I Clock input (16.5 MHz) 55 VCC - Power supply 56 CKSW1 I Chuck sensor input 57 OCSW1 I Tray sensor input 58 CS0X O External ROM chip select signal output 59 CS1X - Not used 60 CS2X O Chip select signal output (for AV DEC) 61 CS3X O Chip select signal output (for AV DEC) 62 CS4X O Chip select signal output (for ARP) 63 CS5X O Chip select signal output (for servo DSP) 64 C - Capacitor (0.1uF) connect between ground 65 CS6X - Not used 66 CS7X - Not used 67 XWAIT I Wait signal input 68 BGRNTX - Test terminal (fixed at “H”) 69 BRQ - Test terminal 70 XRD O Read enable signal output Pin No. Pin name I/O Function 1-5 HA17-HA21 O Address bus A17-A21 6 HA22 - Not used 7 WP O Write control signal output to EEPROM 8 TRM–/XKRCS - Not used 9 AVCC - Power supply 10 AVRH - Reference power supply (+3.3 V) 11 AVSS - Ground 12 AN0 I Set of mode 0 13 AN1 I Set of mode 1 14 AN2 I Set of mode 2 15 AN3 I Input of interrupt from S101 (AV-58) 16 INT0 I Input of interrupt from AV DEC 17 INT1 I Input of interrupt from ARP 18 INT2 I Input of interrupt from servo DSP 19 INT3 - Not used 20 INT4 I Input of interrupt from IF CON 21 INT5 - Not used 22 INT6 - Not used 23 INT7 - Not used 24 VCC - Power supply 25 SI0 I Serial data input from IF CON 26 SO0 O Serial data output to IF CON 27 SC0 O Serial clock output to IF CON 28 SI1 I Serial bus 1 (for data input) 29 SO1 O Serial bus 1 (for data output) 30 SC1 O Serial clock output 31 SI2 I Serial bus 2 (for data input) 32 SO2 O Serial bus 2 (for data output) 33 DSENS - Not used 34 VSS - Ground 35 XRST O System reset signal output 36 XARPRST O Reset signal output for ARP 37 RGBSEL/MICMUTE O RGB signal select signal output/Mic mute signal output 38 SDA I/O I2C bus seria data input/output 5-1. SYSTEM CONTROL PIN FUNCTION (MB-100 BOARD IC103) www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 5-2 E Pin No. Pin name I/O Function 71 XWRH O High byte write enable signal output (16 bit and 8 bit) 72 XWRL - Not used 73 NMIX - Not used (fixed at “H”) 74 HSTX - Not used (fixed at “H”) 75 VSS - Ground 76 XFRRST I Reset signal input from IF CON 77 CPUCK O CPU clock signal output 78 OCSW2 - Not used 79 XDACS O Chip select signal output to DAC (2ch, 6ch) 80 VESCS/X39CS O Chip select signal output to DSP 81 48/44.1K O PLL FS control signal output 82 WIDE O WIDE select signal output 83 MAMUTE O Audio mute signal output 84 XLDON O LD control signal output 85-92 HD0-HD7 I/O Data bus D0-D7 (16 bit only) 93-100 HD8-HD15 I/O Data bus D8-D15 (16 bit) , D0-D7 (8 bit) 101 VSS - Ground 102-109 HA0-HA7 O Address bus A00-A07 110 VCC - Power supply 111-118 HA8-HA15 O Address bus A08-A15 119 VSS - Ground 120 HA16 O Address bus A16 www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 6-1 6-3. SYSCON DIAGNOSIS The same contents as board detail check by serial interface can be checked from the remote commander. On the Test Mode Menu screen, press [0] key on the remote com- mander, and the following check menu will be displayed. ### Syscon Diagnosis ### Check Menu 0. Quit 1. All 2. Version 3. Peripheral 4. Servo 5. Supply 6. AV Decoder 7. Video 8. Audio 9. Progre Device _ 0. Quit Quit the Syscon Diagnosis and return to the Test Mode Menu. 1. All All items continuous check This menu checks all diagnostic items continuously. Normally, all items are checked successively one after another automatically unless an error is found, but at a certain item that requires judg- ment through a visual check to the result, the following screen is displayed for the key entry. ### Syscon Diagnosis ### Diag All Check No. 2 Version 2-3. ROM Check Sum Check Sum = xxxx Press NEXT Key to Continue Press PREV Key to Repeat _ For the ROM Check, the check sum calculated by the Syscon is output, and therefore you must compare it with the specified value for confirmation. Following the message, press [NEXT] key to go to the next item, or [PREV] key to repeat the same check again. To quit the diagno- sis and return to the Check Menu screen, press [STOP] or [ENTER] key. If an error occurred, the diagnosis is suspended and the error code is displayed as shown below. ### Syscon Diagnosis ### 3-3. EEPROM Check Error 03: EEPROM Write/Reed N Address : 00000001 Write Data : 2492 Read Data : 2490 Press NEXT Key to Continue Press PREV Key to Repeat _ Press [STOP] key to quit the diagnosis, or [PREV] key to repeat the same item where an error occurred, or [NEXT] key to continue the check from the item next to faulty item. 6-1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION The Test Mode allows you to make diagnosis and adjustment eas- ily using the remote commander and monitor TV. The instructions, diagnostic results, etc. are given on the on-screen display (OSD). 6-2. STARTING TEST MODE Press the [TITLE], [CLEAR], [POWER] keys on the remote com- mander in this order with the power of main unit in OFF status, and the Test Mode starts, then “DIAG START” will be displayed on the fluorescent display tube and the menu shown below will be displayed on the TV screen. At the bottom of menu screen, the model name and revision number are displayed. Last Off at the lower right of screen indicates the information code concerning the last power off. To execute each function, select the desired menu and press its number on the remote commander. To exit from the Test Mode, press the [POWER] key. Test Mode Menu 0. Syscon Diagnosis 1. Drive Auto Adjustment 2. Drive Manual Operation 3. Mecha Aging 4. Emergency History 5. Version Information 6. Video Level Adjustment Exit: POWER Key _ Model : DPX-1430xx Revision : 1.xxxx Last Off: xx Power Off Information Code List 00 : Primary Power Off 01 : Power Off Request from SYSTEM CONTROL 02 : Power Off by Emergency Power Off Command from SYS- TEM CONTROL (if information is sent from SYSTEM CONTROL) 03 : IF CON Judged that SYSTEM CONTROL is Faulty 04 : Power Off from Diagnosis Mode of IF CON 05 : Forced Power Off by the User 06 : Power Off by Power Supply Voltage Monitor SECTION 6 TEST MODE DVP-NS700P www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 6-2 Submenu Selecting 2 and subsequent items calls the submenu screen of each item. For example, if “5. Supply” is selected, the following submenu will be displayed. ### Syscon Diagnosis ### Check Menu No. 5 Supply 0. Quit 1. All 2. ARP Register Check 3. ARP to RAM Data Bus 4. ARP to RAM Address Bus 5. ARP RAM Check _ 0. Quit Quit the submenu and return to the main menu. 1. All All submenu items continuous check. This menu checks 2 and subsequent items successively. At the item where visual check is required for judgment or an error occurred, the checking is suspended and the message is output for key entry. Normally, all items are checked successively one after another au- tomatically unless an error is found. Selecting 2 and subsequent items executes respective menus and outputs the results. For the contents of each submenu, see “General Description of Checking Method” and “Check Items List”. General Description of Checking Method 2. Version (2-2) Revision ROM revision number is displayed. Error: Not detected. The revision number defined in the source file of ROM (IC107) is displayed with four digits. (2-3) ROM Check Sum Check sum is calculated. Error: Not detected. 8-bit data are added up to the ROM (IC107) address 0x000F0000 to 0x002EFFFF, and the result is displayed with 4-digit hexadecimal number. Error is not detected. Compare the result with the specified value. (2-4) Model Type Model code is displayed. Error: Not detected. The model code read from the EEPROM is displayed with 2-digit hexadecimal number. (2-5) Region Region code is displayed. Error: Not detected. The region code determined from the model code is dis- played. (2-6) AD 3 PORT Check AD 3 PORT status is displayed. Error: Not detected. Which status, High (Pull Up), NC (Non Connect), or Low (Pull Down), the AD 3 PORT is placed in now is checked. 3. Peripheral (3-2) Gate Array Check Data write → read, and accord check Error 02: Gate array write/read discord Data of 0x00 to 0xFF is written sequentially to the address 0xF and then read for checking. (3-3) EEPROM Check Data write → read, and accord check Error 03: EEPROM write/read discord 0x9249, 0x2942 and 0x4294 are written to the address 0x00 to 0xFF of the EEPROM and then read for checking. Be- fore writing, the data are saved, then after checking, they are written to restore the contents of EEPROM. 4. Servo (4-2) Servo DSP Check Data write → read, and accord check Error 12: Read data discord 0x9249, 0x2942 and 0x4294 are written to the RAM ad- dress 0x602 of the Servo DSP and then read for checking. Also, OPT type “1 LASER” or “2 LASER” is displayed. (4-3) DSP Driver Test Test signal data → DSP Driver Error: Not detected. Caution: Do not perform this checking with the mechanical deck connected. The maximum voltage is applied to the Servo Driver IC (IC401). If the mechanical deck is connected, it will be destroyed immediately. Following the output message, disconnect the mechanical deck, then enter the specified 4- or 5-digit value from the commander, and press the [ENTER] key. The test is conducted only if the entered value accords. To exit the test, check the output level, then press [NEXT] key. This check is not conducted, but skipped in “All” menu item. Supplement: How to disconnect mechanical deck Disconnect flexible flat cables connected to the CN201 and CN202 of MB-100 board. Also, discon- nect flat cable from the CN402. Model Type US, Canadian 2 0 www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 6-3 5. Supply (5-2) ARP Register Check Data write → read, and accord check Error 08: ARP register write, and read data discord Data 0x00 to 0xFF is written sequentially to the ARP TMAX register (address 0xC6) and then read for checking. (5-3) ARP to RAM Data Bus Data write → read, and accord check Error 09: ARP ←→ RAM data bus error Data 0x0001 to 0x8000 where one bit each is set to 1 are written to the address 0 of RAM (IC303) connected to the ARP (IC302) through the bus, then they are read and checked. In case of discord, written bit pattern and read data are displayed. If data where multiple bits are 1 are read, the bits concerned may touch each other. Further, if data where certain bit is always 1 or 0 regardless of written data, the line could be disconnected or shorted. (5-4) ARP to RAM Address Bus Data write → other address read discord check Error 10: ARP ←→ RAM address bus error Caution: Address and data display in case of an error is different from the display of other diagnosis (de- scribed later). Before starting the test, all addresses of RAM (IC303) are cleared to 0x0000. First, 0xA55A is written to the address 0x00000, and the address data are read and checked from addresses 0x00001 to 0x80000 while shifting 1 bit each. Next, the data at that address is cleared, and it is written to the address 0x00001, and read and checked in the same manner. This check is repeated up to the address 0x80000 while shifting the ad- dress data by 1 bit each. If data other than 0 is read at the addresses except written address, an error is given because all addresses were al- ready cleared to 0. In this check, the error display pattern is different from that of other diagnosis; read data, written address, and read address are displayed in this order. How- ever, the message uses same template, and accordingly ex- change Address and Data when reading. The following dis- play, for example, ### Syscon Diagnosis ### 5-4. ARP to RAM Address Bus Error 10: ARP - RAM Address B Address : 0000A55A Write Data : 00000000 Read Data : 00080000 Press NEXT Key to Continue Press PREV Key to Repeat _ shows the data 0xA55A was read from address 0x00080000 though it was written to the address 0x00000000. This im- plies that these addresses are in the form of shadow. Also, if the read data is not 0xA55A, another error will be present. (5-5) ARP RAM Check Data write → read, and accord check Error 11: ARP RAM read data discord The program code data stored in ROM are copied to all areas of RAM (IC303) connected to the ARP (IC302) through the bus, then they are read and checked if they ac- cord. If the detail check was selected initially, the data are written to all areas and read, then the same test is conducted once again with the data where all bits are inverted between 1 and 0. If discord is detected, faulty address, written data, and read data are displayed following the error code 11, and the test is suspended. 6. AV Decoder (6-2) 1930 RAM Data write → read, and accord check Error 13: AVD RAM read data discord The program code data stored in ROM (IC107) are copied to all areas of RAM (IC504, IC505) connected to the AVD (IC503) through the bus, then they are read and checked if they accord. Further, the same test is conducted once again with the data where all bits are inverted between 1 and 0. If discord is detected, faulty address, written data, and read data are displayed following the error code 13, and the test is suspended. During the test, OSD display becomes blank as the OSD area is also checked. (6-3) 1930 SP ROM → AVD RAM → Video OUT Error: Not detected. The data including sub picture streams in ROM (IC107) are transferred to the RAM (IC504, IC505) in AVD (IC503), and output as video signals from the AVD (IC503). Though OSD display becomes blank, the output of video signals continues until the key is pressed. They are output from all video terminals (Composite, Y/ C, Component). 7. Video (7-2) Color Bar AVD color bar command write → Video OUT Error: Not detected. The command is transferred to the AVD, and the color bar signals are output from video terminals. They are output from all video terminals (Composite, Y/C, Component). 8. Audio (8-2) ARP → 1930 Error14 : ARP → 1930 video NG 15 : ARP → 1930 audio NG (8-3) Test Tone A pink noise signal is output from the AVD (IC503) through optical coaxial digital terminal and analog audio terminal. Error: Not detected. After turning on all outputs, each time the [NEXT] key is pressed, the output channel is switched for individual chan- nel checking. Left + Right → Left → Right are checked in this order. www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 6-4 9. Progre Device (9-2) I/P Converter Data write → read, and accord check Error 03: EEPROM write/read discord Data 0xCC is written to the address 0x9B of the EEPROM and then read for checking. Before writing, the data are saved, then after checking, they are written to restore the contents of EEPROM. (9-3) Video Encoder Data write → read, and accord check Error 03: EEPROM write/read discord Data 0x10 is written to the address 0xA0 of the EEPROM and then read for checking. Before writing, the data are saved, then after checking, they are written to restore the contents of EEPROM. (9-4) Progre Video ROM → ARP → Video OUT Error: Not detected. To confirm the Progressive output, the colorbar signals are taken from ROM (IC107 or IC108) to ARP (IC302) and output from AVD (IC503) from all video terminal. Check Items List 2) Version (2-2) Revision (2-3) ROM Check Sum (2-4) Model Type (2-5) Region 3) Peripheral (3-2) Gate Array Check (3-3) EEPROM Check 4) Servo (4-2) Servo DSP Check (4-3) DSP Driver Test 5) Supply (5-2) ARP Register Check (5-3) ARP to RAM Data Bus (5-4) ARP to RAM Address Bus (5-5) ARP RAM Check 6) AV Decoder (6-2) 1930 RAM (6-3) 1930 SP 7) Video (7-2) Color Bar 8) Audio (8-2) ARP → 1930 (8-3) Test Tone 9) Progre Device (9-2) I/P Converter (9-3) Video Encoder (9-4) Progre Video Error Codes List 00: Error not detected 01: RAM write/read data discord 02: Gate array NG 03: EEPROM NG 04: Flash memory clear error 05: Flash memory write error 06: Flash memory read data discord 07: 2725 read data discord 08: ARP register read data discord 09: ARP ←→ RAM data bus error 10: ARP ←→ RAM address bus error 11: ARP RAM read data discord 12: Servo DSP NG 13: 1930 SDRAM NG 14: ARP → 1930 video NG 15: ARP → 1930 audio NG 16: 1910 UCODE download NG 17: System call error (function not supported) 18: System call error (parameter error) 19: System call error (illegal ID number) 20: System call error (time out) 21: NAND Flash faulty blocks exceed 10 90: Error occurred 91: User verification NG 92: Diagnosis cancelled www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 6-5 6-4. DRIVE AUTO ADJUSTMENT On the Test Mode Menu screen, press [1] key on the remote com- mander, and the drive auto adjustment menu will be displayed. ## Drive Auto Adjustment ## Adjustment Menu 0. ALL 1. DVD-SL 2. CD 3. DVD-DL 4. LCD Exit: RETURN Normally, [0] is selected to adjust DVD (single layer), CD, DVD (dual layer), and LCD (SACD) in this order. But, individual items can be adjusted for the case where adjustment is suspended due to an error. In this mode, the adjustment can be made easily through the operation following the message displayed on the screen. Which disc is currently adjusted is displayed on the fluorescent display tube. The disc used for adjustment must be the one specified for adjust- ment. 0. ALL You will be asked if EEPROM data are initialized or not, and for this prompt, select [0] and press the [ENTER] key. First , the servo setting data in EEPROM, Emergency History and Hour Meter are cleared to initialize. Then, 1. DVD-SL disc, 2. CD disc, 3. DVD- DL disc, and 4. LCD disc (SACD disc) are adjusted in this order. Each time one disc was adjusted, it is ejected, and therefore ex- change the disc following the message. Though the message to confirm whether the discs is to be adjusted is not displayed except for LCD disk (SACD disk), you can exit the adjustment by press- ing the [STOP] button. In adjusting each disc, the mirror time is measured to check the disk type. In the auto adjustment, whether the disc type is correct is not checked unlike conventional models, and accordingly, take care not to insert a different type of disc. 1. DVD-SL (single layer) Select [1], insert DVD single layer disc, and press [ENTER] key, and the adjustment will be made through the following steps, then adjusted values will be written to the EEPROM. DVD Single Layer Disc Adjustment Steps 1. SLED TILT Reset 2. Disc Check Memory SL 3. Set Disc Type SL 4. Spdl Start 5. Wait 1 sec 6. LD ON 7. Focus Error Check 8. Focus ON 0 9. Auto Track Offset Adjust L0 10. Trv Level Check 11. Tracking ON 12. Wait 100 msec 13. CLVA ON 14. Wait 500 msec 15. Sled ON 16. Auto Loop Filter Offset Adjust 17. Auto Focus Gain Adjust L0 18. Auto Focus Balance Adjust L0 19. EQ Boost Adjust 20. Auto Loop Filter Offset Adjust 21. RF Level Measure 22. Jitter Disp ON 23. Jitter Memory 24. Jitter Disp OFF 25. Eep Copy Loop Filter Offset 26. All Servo Stop www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 6-6 2. CD Select [2], insert CD disc, and press [ENTER] key, and the adjust- ment will be made through the following steps, then adjusted val- ues will be written to the EEPROM. CD Adjustment Steps 1. Sled Tilt Reset 2. Disc Check Memory CD 3. Set Disc Type CD 4. Spdl Start 5. Wait 1 sec 6. LD ON 7. Focus Error Check 8. Fcs ON 1 9. Auto Track Offset Adjust L0 10. Trv Level Check 11. Tracking ON 12. Wait 100 msec 13. CLVA ON 14. Wait 500 msec 15. Sled ON 16. Auto Loop Filter Offset Adjust 17. Auto Focus Gain Adjust L0 18. Auto Focus Balance Adjust L0 19. Eq Boost Adjust 20. Auto Loop Filter Offset Adjust 21. Auto Track Gain Adjust 22. RF Level Measure 23. Jitter Disp ON 24. Jitter Memory 25. Jitter Disp OFF 26. All Servo Stop 3. DVD-DL (dual layer) Select [3], insert DVD dual layer disc, and press [ENTER] key, and the adjustment will be made through the following steps, then adjusted values will be written to the EEPROM. DVD Dual Layer Disc Adjustment Steps 1. Sled Tilt Reset 2. Disc Check Memory DL 3. Set Disc Type DL Layer 1 Adjust 4. Spdl Start (Wait 1 sec) 5. LD ON 6. Fcs ON 1 7. Auto Track Offset Adjust L1 8. Tracking ON 9. Wait 100 msec 10. Clva ON (Wait 500 msec) 11. Sled ON 12. Auto Focus Gain Adjust L1 13. Auto Focus Balance Adjust L1 14. Eq Boost Adjust L1 15. Auto Track Gain Adjust L1 16. Jitter Disp ON 17. Jitter Memory 18. Jitter Disp Off Layer 0 Adjust 19. Focus Jump (L1 → L0) 20. Auto Track Offset Adjust L0 21. Tracking ON (Wait 100 msec) 22. Clva ON (Wait 500 msec) 23. Sled ON 24. Auto Focus Gain Adjust L0 25. Auto Focus Balance Adjust L0 26. Eq Boost Adjust L0 27. Auto Track Gain Adjust L0 28. Jitter Disp ON 29. Jitter Memory 30. Jitter Disp OFF 31. All Servo Stop 4. LCD (SACD) This model does not adjust it because the adjusted data of CD are reflected. www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 6-7 6-5. DRIVE MANUAL OPERATION On the Test Mode Menu screen, select [2], and the manual opera- tion menu will be displayed. For the manual operation, each servo on/off control and adjustment can be executed manually. ## Drive Manual Operation ## Operation Menu 1. Disc type 2. Servo Control 3. Track/Layer Jump 4. Manual Adjustment 5. Auto Adjustment 6. Memory Check 0. Disc Check Memory Exit: RETURN In using the manual operation menu, take care of the following points. These commands do not provide protection, thus requiring correct operation. The sector address or time code field is dis- played when a disc is loaded. 1. Set correctly the disc type to be used on the Disc Type screen. The disc type must be set after a disc was loaded. The set disc type is cleared when the tray is opened. 2. After power ON, if the Drive Manual Operation was se- lected, first perform “Reset SLED TILT” by opening 1. Disc Type screen. 3. In case of an alarm, immediately press the [STOP] but- ton to stop the servo operation, and turn the power OFF. Basic operation (controllable from front panel or remote com- mander) [POWER] Power OFF [STOP] Servo stop [OPEN/CLOSE] Stop+Eject/Loading [RETURN] Return to Operation Menu or Test Mode Menu [NEXT], [PREV] Transition between sub modes of menu [1] to [9], [0] Selection of menu items Cursor UP/DOWN Increase/Decrease in manually adjusted value 0. Disc Check Memory Disc Check 1. SL Disc Check 2. CD Disc Check 3. DL Disc Check 0. Reset SLED TILT On this screen, the mirror time is measured and written to the EEPROM to check the disc type. First, set a DVD SL disc and press [1], then set a CD disc and press [2], and finally set a DVD DL disc and press [3]. The measured mirror time is displayed re- spectively. The adjustment must be executed more than once after default data were written. Reference value for DVD is from 10 to 20, and for CD, from 28 to 4F. Check that the value of CD is larger than that of DVD. When those values are beyond a range perform this adjustment again. From this screen, you can go to another mode by pressing [NEXT] or [PREV] key, but you cannot enter this mode from another mode. You can enter this mode from the Operation Menu screen only. 1. Disc Type Disc Type 1. Disc Type Auto Check 2. DVD SL 12 cm 3. DVD DL 12 cm 4. CD 12cm 5. LCD 12 cm 6. DVD SL 8 cm 7. DVD DL 8 cm 8. CD 8 cm 9. LCD 8 cm 0. Reset SLED TILT EMG. 00 On this screen, select the disc type. To select the disc type, press the number of the loaded disc. The selected disc type is displayed at the bottom. Selecting [1] automatically selects and displays the disc type. In case of wrong display, retry “Disc Check Memory”. Also, opening the tray causes the set disc type to be cleared. In this case, set the disc type again after loading. In performing manual operation, the disc type must be set. Once the disc type has been selected, the sector address or time code display field will appear as shown below. These values are displayed when PLL is locked. Disc Type 1. Disc Type Auto Check 2. DVD SL 12 cm 3. DVD DL 12 cm 4. CD 12cm 5. LCD 12 cm 6. DVD SL 8 cm 7. DVD DL 8 cm 8. CD 8 cm 9. LCD 8 cm 0. Reset SLED TILT SA.------ SI.-- EMG. 00 DVD SL 12 cm Display when DVD SL 12cm disc was selected www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 6-8 Disc Type 1. Disc Type Auto Check 2. DVD SL 12 cm 3. DVD DL 12 cm 4. CD 12cm 5. LCD 12 cm 6. DVD SL 8 cm 7. DVD DL 8 cm 8. CD 8 cm 9. LCD 8 cm 0. Reset SLED TILT TC.---:---:--- EMG. 00 CD 12 cm Display when CD 12cm disc was selected [0] Reset SLED TILT Reset the Sled and Tilt to initial posi- tion. [1] Disc Type Check Judge automatically the loaded disc. As the judged result is displayed at the bot- tom of screen, make sure that it is cor- rect. If Disc Check Memory menu has not been executed after EEPROM default setting, the disc type cannot be judged. In this case, return to the initial menu and make a check for three types of discs (SL, DL, CD). [2] to [9] Select the loaded disc. The adjusted value is written to the address of se- lected disc. No further entry is neces- sary if [1] was selected. 2. Servo Control Servo Control 1. LD Off R. Sled FWD 2. SP Off L. Sled REV 3. Focus Off 4. TRK. Off 5. Sled Off 6. CLVA Off 7. FCS. Srch Off 0. Reset SLED TILT SA.------ SI.-- EMG. 00 DVD SL 12 cm On this screen, the servo on/off control necessary for replay is executed. Normally, turn on each servo from 1 sequentially and when CLVA is turned on, the usual trace mode becomes active. In the trace mode, DVD sector address or CD time code is displayed. This is not displayed where the spindle is not locked. The spindle could run overriding the control if the spindle system is faulty or RF is not present. In such a case, do not operate CLVA. [0] Reset SLED TILT Reset the Sled and Tilt to initial posi- tion. [1] LD Turn ON/OFF the laser. [2] SP Turn ON/OFF the spindle. [3] Focus Search the focus and turn on the focus. [4] TRK Turn ON/OFF the tracking servo. [5] Sled Turn ON/OFF the sled servo. [6] CLVA Turn ON/OFF normal servo of spindle servo. [7] FCS. Srch Apply same voltage as that of focus search to the focus drive to check the focus drive system. → Sled FWD Move the sled outward. Perform this operation with the tracking servo turned off. ← Sled REV Move the sled inward. Perform this op- eration with the tracking servo turned off. 3. Track/Layer Jump Tracking/Layer Jump 1. 1Tj FWD R. Fj (L1 → L0) 2. 1Tj REV L. Fj (L0 → L1) 3. 2Tj FWD U. Lj (L1 → L0) 4. 2Tj REV D. Lj (L0 → L1) 5. NTj FWD 6. NTj REV 7. 500Tj FWD 8. 500Tj REV 9. 10k/20k FWD 0. 10k/20k REV SA.------ SI.-- EMG. 00 DVD SL 12 cm On this screen, track jump, etc. can be performed. Only for the DVD-DL, the focus jump and layer jump are displayed in the right field. [1] 1Tj FWD 1-track jump forward. [2] 1Tj REV 1-track jump reverse. [3] 2Tj FWD 2-track jump forward. [4] 2Tj REV 2-track jump reverse. [5] NTj FWD N-track jump forward. [6] NTj REV N-track jump reverse. [7] 500Tj FWD Fine search forward. [8] 500Tj REV Fine search reverse. [9] 10k/20k FWD Direct search forward. [0] 10k/20k REV Direct search reverse. – The following commands are valid for DVD-DL disc only – → Fj (L1 → L0) Focus jump forward. (Trk/Sled Servo OFF) ← Fj (L0 → L1) Focus jump reverse. (Trk/Sled Servo OFF) ↑ Lj (L1 → L0) Layer jump forward. (Trk/Sled Servo ON) ↓ Lj (L0 → L1) Layer jump reverse. (Trk/Sled Servo ON) www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 6-9 4. Manual Adjustment Manual Adjustment 1. TRK. Offset 2. Focus Gain 3. TRK. Gain 4. Focus Offset 5. Focus Balance 6. L.F. Offset 7. EQ BOOST 8. GD ADJ Adjustment : Up/Down Jitter 1D SA.------ SI.-- EMG. 00 DVD SL 12 cm On this screen, each item can be adjusted manually. Select the desired number [1] to [8] from the remote commander, and cur- rent setting for the selected item will be displayed, then increase or decrease numeric value with ↑ key or ↓ key. This value is stored in the EEPROM. If CLV has been applied, the jitter is dis- played for reference for the adjustment. [1] TRK. Offset Adjusts tracking offset. [2] Focus Gain Adjusts focus gain. [3] TRK. Gain Adjusts track gain. [4] Focus Offset Adjusts focus offset. [5] Focus Balance Adjusts focus balance. [6] L.F. Offset Adjusts loop filter offset. [7] EQ BOOST [8] GD ADJ 5. Auto Adjustment Auto Adjustment 1. Auto TRK. Offset 2. Auto Focus Balance 3. Auto Focus Offset 4. Auto Focus Gain 5. Auto TRK. Gain 6. Auto EQ 7. Auto L.F. Offset 8. Auto Group Delay SA.------ SI.-- EMG. 00 DVD SL 12 cm On this screen, each item can be adjusted automatically. Select the desired number [1] to [8] from the remote commander, and se- lected item is adjusted automatically. [1] Auto TRK. Offset Adjusts tracking offset. [2] Auto Focus Balance Adjusts focus balance. [3] Auto Focus Offset Adjusts focus offset. [4] Auto Focus Gain Adjusts focus gain. [5] Auto TRK. Gain Adjusts track gain. [6] Auto EQ [7] Auto L.F. Offset Adjusts loop filter offset. [8] Auto Group Delay 6. Memory Check EEPROM DATA 1 -– DL -– CD LCD SL L0 L1 Focus Gain xx xx xx xx xx TRK. Gain xx xx xx xx xx FCS Balance xx xx xx xx xx Focus Bias xx xx xx xx xx TRV. Offset xx xx xx xx xx L.F. Offset xx xx xx xx xx EQ Boost xx xx xx xx xx Mirror Time xx -- xx xx _ DOWN : Next Data CLEAR: Default Set page. 1/2 EEPROM DATA 2 -– DL -– CD LCD SL L0 L1 RF Jitter xx -- xx xx xx RF Level xx -- xx -- -- FE Level xx -- xx -- -- FE Balance xx -- xx -- -- TRV. Level xx -- xx -- -- Analog FRSW xx xx xx xx xx PLL Dac Gain xx xx xx xx xx _ UP : Prev Data CLEAR: Default Set page. 2/2 On this screen, current servo adjusted data stored in the EEPROM are displayed. The adjusted data are initialized by pressing the [CLEAR] key, but be careful that they are not recoverable after initialization. Before clearing the adjusted data, make a note of the set data. This screen will also appear if [0] All is selected in the Drive Auto Adjustment. In this case, default setting cannot be made. For reference, the drive has been designed so that the gain center value is 20 and offset value is 80. Other values will be in a range of 10 to 80. If extreme value such as 00 or FF is set, adjustment will be faulty. In such a case, check for disc scratch or cable dis- connection, then perform adjustment again. www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 6-10 6-6. MECHA AGING ### Mecha Aging ### Press OPEN key Abort: STOP key On the Test Mode Menu screen, selecting [3] executes the aging of mechanism. First, open the tray and load a disc. Press the [PLAY] key, and the aging will start. When the tray is closed, the disc type and size are judged and displayed. During aging, the repeat cycle is displayed. Aging can be aborted at any time by pressing the [STOP] key. After the operation has stopped, unload the disc and press again the [STOP] key or the [RETURN] key to return to the Test Mode Menu. 6-7. EMERGENCY HISTORY ### MEG. History ### Laser Hours CD xxxxxxxh DVD xxxxxxxh 1. 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 2. 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Select: 1 – 9 Scroll: UP/DOWN (1: Last EMG.) Exit: Return On the Test Mode Menu screen, selecting [4] displays the infor- mation such as servo emergency history. The history information from last 1 up to 10 can be scrolled with ↑ key or ↓ key. Also, specific information can be displayed by directly entering that number with ten keys. The upper two lines display the laser ON total hours. Data below minutes are omitted. Clearing History Information Clearing laser hours Press [DISPLAY] and [CLEAR] keys in this order. Both CD and DVD data are cleared. Clearing emergency history Press [TITLE] and [CLEAR] keys in this order. Initializing set up data Press [DVD] and [CLEAR] keys in this order. The data have been initialized when “Set Up Initialized” mes- sage is displayed. The EMG. History screen will be restored soon. 1. 3 1 2 2 How to see Emergency History 1: Emergency Code 2: Don't Care These codes are used for verification of software designing. 3: Historical order 1 to 9 Emergency Codes List 10: Communication to IC202 (MB-100 board) failed. 11: Each servo for focus, tracking, and spindle is unlocked. 12: Communication to EEPROM, IC101 (MB-100 board) failed. 13: Writing of hours meter data to EEPROM, IC101 (MB-100 board) failed. 14: Communication to Servo DSP IC302 (MB-100 board) failed, or Servo DSP is faulty. 20: Initialization of tilt servo and sled servo failed. They are not placed in the initial position. 21: Tilt servo operation error 22: Syscon made a request to move the tilt servo to wrong posi- tion. 23: Sled servo operation error 24: Syscon made a request to move the sled servo to wrong posi- tion. 30: Tracking balance adjustment error 31: Tracking gain adjustment error 32: Focus balance adjustment error 33: Focus bias adjustment error 34: Focus gain adjustment error 35: Tilt servo adjustment error 36: RF equalizer adjustment error 37: RF group delay adjustment error 38: Jitter value after adaptive servo operation is too large. 40: Focus servo does not operate. 41: With a dual layer (DL) disc, focus jump failed. 50: CLV (spindle) servo does not operate. 51: Spindle does not stop. 60: With a DVD disc, Syscon made a request to seek nonexistent address. 61: With a CD disc, Syscon made a request to seek nonexistent address. 62: With a CD disc, Syscon made a request to seek nonexistent track No. and index No. 63: With a DVD disc, seeking of target address failed. 64: With a CD disc, seeking of target address failed. 65: With a CD disc, seeking of target index failed. 70: With a DVD disc, physical information data could not be read. 71: With a CD disc, TOC data could not be read. 80: Disc type judgment failed. 81: As disc type judgment failed, retry was repeated. 82: As disc type judgment failed, a measurement error occurred. 83: Disc type could not be judged within the specified time. 84: Illegal command code was received from Syscon. 85: Illegal command was received from Syscon. www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 6-11 6-8. VERSION INFORMATION ## Version Information ## IF con. Ver : x. xxx (xxxx) Group 00 SYScon. Ver : x. xxx (xxxx) Model xx Region 0x Servo DSP. Ver : 1. xxxx OPT Type : x LASER Exit: RETURN _ The ROM version, region code, OPT type, etc. are displayed if [5] is selected in the Test Mode Menu. The parenthesized hexadecimal number in the version number field indicates the checksum value of the ROM. Note : After down loading ROM data, sometimes it happens that checksum is not the same as that of ROM data which has been down loaded. In such a case, go back to the menu and select “0. Syscon Diagnosis”, then select “1. All” in “2. Version”. If the result of this operation does not give an agreement, it must be either Down Load error or ROM error. 6-9. VIDEO LEVEL ADJUSTMENT On the Test Mode Menu screen, selecting [6] displays color bars for video level adjustment. During display of color bars, OSD dis- appears but the menu screen will be restored if pressing any key. 1. VIDEO LEVEL ADJUSTMENT Measurement point : LINE OUT VIDEO (75 Ω terminating resistance) Measuring instrument : Oscilloscope Adjustment device : RV501 on MB-100 board Specified value : 1.00 Vp-p 2. PROG VIDEO LEVEL ADJUSTMENT Measurement point : COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y) (75 Ω terminating resistance) Measuring instrument : Oscilloscope Adjustment device : RV901 on MB-100 board Specified value : 1.00 Vp-p 1.00 + 0.04 Vp-p — 0.02 6-10. IF CON SELF DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION 1. IF-83 BOARD (IF CON) TEST MODE The front board test mode is the IF CON self diagnostic mode. The IF CON can diagnose the functions of the front panel boards that the IF CON controls. Normally, the IF CON makes a serial communication with the SYSTEM CONTROL and operates fol- lowing the commands from the SYSTEM CONTROL, but in the Test mode, the IF CON operates independently from the SYS- TEM CONTROL. In the Test mode, the following functions can be checked. 1. Button function 2. Remote commander receiving function 3. SYSTEM CONTROL-IF CON serial communication 4. Click shuttle function 5. Fluorescent display tube lighting check Grid check Anode check 6. LED control function In the Test mode, the set operates same as usual, except voltage monitoring, communication monitoring, display of fluorescent display tube, and LED control. 1. The routine that monitors +3.3 V (P-CONT) of MB-100 board is not provided. 2. The monitoring timer for serial communication with the SYS- TEM CONTROL is not provided. The set is not placed in the Standby mode, even if the communication with SYSTEM CONTROL is normal. 3. Display of fluorescent display tube (normally, display is made following the commands from SYSTEM CONTROL) 4. LED control (normally, control is made following the com- mands from SYSTEM CONTROL) 2. OPERATION OF SELF CHECK MODE The Self Check mode is the function to conduct the basic test to the FL display and DVD panel section. 2-1. Self Check Mode Transition Processing At the AC Power ON after IF CON (IC404) was reset, the input to 10pin (SELF CHECK) is judged and if “Low” is entered, the main unit transits to the Self Check mode. In this port input judgment, the result of 3-time attempts must be same (assuming that the MB- 100 and AV-58 boards are not connected). While pressing the [STOP] key on the main unit with the IF CON in STANDBY mode, enter [RETURN] → [DISPLAY] (or [SET UP]) on the remote com- mander, and the unit transits to the Self Check Mode. The Self Check mode terminates when the IF CON transits to the STANDBY mode. 1.00 Vp-p + 0.04 – 0.02 + 0.04 – 0.02 + 0.04 – 0.02 www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 6-12 S H U F F L E Digital MPEG DTS DISC PBC ANGLE REPEAT 1 PGM A- B NTSC TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC VIDEO CD D V D C D S H U F F L E Digital MPEG DTS DISC PBC ANGLE REPEAT 1 PGM A- B NTSC TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC VIDEO CD D V D C D S H U F F L E Digital MPEG DTS DISC PBC ANGLE REPEAT 1 PGM A- B NTSC TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC VIDEO CD D V D C D S H U F F L E Digital MPEG DTS DISC PBC ANGLE REPEAT 1 PGM A- B NTSC TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC VIDEO CD D V D C D S H U F F L E 2-2. Operation of Auto Self Check When the Self Check mode becomes active at the AC Power ON or by key input, the test display of the following steps (1) to (4) is repeated. (1) FLD and LED all ON (for 5 seconds) (2) MODEL display (for 2 seconds) (3) Version display (for 2 seconds) (4) ROM creation date display (for 2 seconds) www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 6-13 2-3. Each Self Check Function Each Self Check function tests the FLD display, LED display, and key input. 2-3-1. FLD and LED All ON 2-3-1-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode • [STOP] key and [OPEN/CLOSE] key on the main unit • [LEFT] key on the main unit and the remote commander 2-3-1-2. Operation and Display In this mode, all LEDs except STANDBY LED and all segments of FLD turn ON. Example of FLD all ON S H U F F L E Digital MPEG DTS DISC PBC ANGLE REPEAT 1 PGM A- B NTSC TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC VIDEO CD D V D C D S H U F F L E 2-3-2. Main Unit Key Name Display and Key Code Display 2-3-2-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode • Keys on main unit except keys transited in self check 2-3-2-2. Operation and Display When a key on the main unit is pressed in the Self Check mode, the name of that key is displayed on the FLD. Also, the key name display and the key code display can be switched with the [DIS- PLAY] key on the remote commander. “NOTHING” is displayed when nothing is entered. Also, VIDEO CD, DVD, and CD seg- ments turn on when a communication error occurred. FLD display (at input of [PLAY] key on the main unit) S H U F F L E Digital MPEG DTS DISC PBC ANGLE REPEAT 1 PGM A- B NTSC TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC VIDEO CD D V D C D Input IC404: Pin No. (Signal) Voltage [V] Pin ed (BNRKEY) Pin ef (O/C) Pin eg (PLAY) Pin eh (DISPLAY) Pin ej (CURSOR) 0 SURROUND OPEN/CLOSE PLAY STOP ENTER 0.70 BNR PAUSE – DISPLAY DOWN 1.31 – PREVIOUS – DVD MENU LEFT 1.97 – NEXT – RETURN UP 2.59 – – – TITLE RIGHT 3.3 – – – – – www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 6-14 Key code display (at input of [PLAY] key, Key code: 0Ah) S H U F F L E Digital MPEG DTS DISC PBC ANGLE REPEAT 1 PGM A- B NTSC TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC VIDEO CD D V D C D Digital MPEG DTS DISC PBC ANGLE REPEAT 1 PGM A- B NTSC TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC VIDEO CD D V D C D S H U F F L E Digital MPEG DTS DISC PBC ANGLE REPEAT 1 PGM A- B NTSC TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC VIDEO CD D V D C D At input of faulty voltage When two keys are pressed 2-3-3. Remote Commander Key Name Display and Key Code Display 2-3-3-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode • Remote commander keys except keys transited in self check 2-3-3-2. Operation and Display When a key on the remote commander is pressed in the Self Check mode, the name of that key is displayed on the FLD. Also, the key name display and the key code display can be switched with the [DISPLAY] key on the remote commander. “NOTHING” is dis- played when nothing is entered. Also, VIDEO CD, DVD, and CD segments turn on when a communication error occurred. Remote commander key name display (at input of [PAUSE] key) S H U F F L E Digital MPEG DTS DISC PBC ANGLE REPEAT 1 PGM A- B NTSC TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC VIDEO CD D V D C D S H U F F L E Digital MPEG DTS DISC PBC ANGLE REPEAT 1 PGM A- B NTSC TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC VIDEO CD D V D C D Remote commander key code display (at input of [PAUSE] key, Key code: 39h) www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 6-15 S H U F F L E Digital MPEG DTS DISC PBC ANGLE REPEAT 1 PGM A- B NTSC TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC VIDEO CD D V D C D S H U F F L E Digital MPEG DTS DISC PBC ANGLE REPEAT 1 PGM A- B NTSC TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC VIDEO CD D V D C D 2-3-4. Communication Monitoring Display The communication state is monitored and displayed while the key name on the main unit and the remote commander is displayed. When the communication to the System Controller failed, VIDEO CD, DVD, and CD segments turn on. Communication error display (at no key input) S H U F F L E Digital MPEG DTS DISC PBC ANGLE REPEAT 1 PGM A- B NTSC TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC VIDEO CD D V D C D S H U F F L E Digital MPEG DTS DISC PBC ANGLE REPEAT 1 PGM A- B NTSC TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC VIDEO CD D V D C D Communication error display (at code display without input of the remote commander) 2-3-5. FLD Anode Test Display and SHUTTLE Click Operation Test 2-3-5-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode • [RIGHT] on the main unit and the remote commander • SHUTTLE on the main unit during Anode Test display 2-3-5-2. Operation and Display The Self Check mode transits to this mode when [RIGHT] key is entered. Only the first segment of each grid of FLD turns on, and each time the SHUTTLE is entered, the segment of each grid is switched in order. When SHUTTLE input is clockwise, the seg- ment switches in 1 → 2 → 3 direction, or counterclockwise it switches in 3 → 2 → 1 direction. This tests whether each segment turns on individually. Display at the start of Anode Test ↓ (Input in CW direction) www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 6-16 2-3-6. FLD Grid Test Display and SHUTTLE Click Operation Test 2-3-6-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode • [UP] on the main unit and the remote commander • SHUTTLE on the main unit during Grid Test display 2-3-6-2. Operation and Display The Self Check mode transits to this mode when [UP] key is en- tered. The first grid of FLD all turns on and other grids turn off. Each time the SHUTTLE is entered, the grid is switched in order. When SHUTTLE input is clockwise, the grid switches in 1 → 2 → 3 direction, or counterclockwise it switches in 3 → 2 → 1 direc- tion. This tests whether each grid turns on individually. Display at the start of Grid Test S H U F F L E Digital MPEG DTS DISC PBC ANGLE REPEAT 1 PGM A- B NTSC TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC VIDEO CD D V D C D S H U F F L E S H U F F L E Digital MPEG DTS DISC PBC ANGLE REPEAT 1 PGM A- B NTSC TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC VIDEO CD D V D C D ↓ (Input in CW direction) 2-3-7. LED Test Display 2-3-7-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode • [DOWN] on the main unit and the remote commander • SHUTTLE on the main unit during LED Test display 2-3-7-2. Operation and Display LED is switched in order by the input of JOG/SHUTTLE. Also, LED ON/OFF is switched by the input of same key as the function that turns on the LED concerned. For the MULTI LED (PROGRES- SIVE) only, there is no key which switches that function, and there- fore use the [RETURN] key on the main unit. FLD display during LED Test 2-3-8. Beep Sound Test 2-3-8-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode • Input of a key on main unit 2-3-8-2. Operation and Display In the Self Check mode, each time a key on the main unit is en- tered, a beep sound of 1kHz (100ms) is generated. S H U F F L E Digital MPEG DTS DISC PBC ANGLE REPEAT 1 PGM A- B NTSC TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC VIDEO CD D V D C D www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 6-17 a f h g e r p n s c col m d Dp j k b 12G 11G 10G 9G 8G 7G 6G 5G 4G 3G 2G 1G a a a a a a a a a a a h h h h h h h h h h h j j j j j j j j j j j k k k k k k k k k k k b b b b b b b b b b b f f f f f f f f f f f m m m m m m m m m m m s s s s s s s s s s s g g g g g g g g g g g c c c c c c c c c c c e e e e e e e e e e e n n n n n n n n n n n p p p p p p p p p p p r r r r r r r r r r r d d d d col col d d d d d d d - - Dp Dp Dp Dp Dp Dp Dp Dp Dp Dp - - - - - - - - - - - - P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P17 P18 ANODE CONNECTION ( 1G~12G ) 1G 5G 6G 7G 8G 9G 10G 11G 12G 3G 4G 2G www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 6-18 6-11. TROUBLESHOOTING 6-11-1. Cannot Enter Test Mode You cannot enter the Test mode when either button has been pressed by any reason with the board assembled in the front panel. In this state, the power does not turn on even under normal condition (the set is kept in standby state), and also no button is active and the remote commander is not accepted. In this case, disconnect the MB-100 board and AV-58 board, and with the SELF CHECK (0 pin) of IF CON (IC404) on the IF-83 board kept in low state, sup- ply AC, and the Test mode will be forcibly activated. Or, on the board, short the land printed as “SELF” to enter the Test mode. The IF CON (IC404) checks the SELF CHECK port only after the power on reset (only at AC supply, not in standby state). If any button is pressed, its name is displayed on the fluorescent display tube. But, if other than “NOTHING” is displayed though no but- ton is pressed, it means that any button has been pressed. 6-11-2. Faults in Test Mode (MB-100 Board) 1. Test mode menu is not displayed • Board visual check Check main IC’s, SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103), ROM (IC107 or IC108), AVD (IC503), and ARP&SERVO (IC302), for mount- ing condition, direction, or evidence of short between pins, or soldering failure. Also, compare with good board to check if there are missing capacitors or resistors. • Clock signal check Measure the clock frequency at CPUCK (uj pin) of the SYS- TEM CONTROL (IC103) using an oscilloscope. If 33 MHz is outputted, an access to the ROM is normal, and then check the items in 1-2. In the case of 8.25 MHz output, check the items in 1-1. If it is fixed to “H” or “L”, the X101 or SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) will be faulty. 1-1. CPUCK (33 MHz) is not outputted • Power supply voltage check Check the power connectors of the boards or power input pins of the IC’s for voltage. Check the IC’s in order of SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103), ROM (IC107 or IC108), AVD (IC503), and ARP&SERVO (IC302). If correct voltage is not outputted, the power line will be shorted, or soldering or IC will be faulty. • Reset signal check Check that the XFRRST (uh pin) of SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) is “H” (3.3 V). If not “H”, a soldering failure of that line, a shot with other line, or faulty SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) is doubtful. • XRD, XWRH, and CS0X signals check Using an oscilloscope, measure the XRD (u; pin), XWRH (ua pin), and CS0X (tk pin) of the SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) to check if they are fixed to “L” (0 V) or “H” (3.3 V), or if they are on the intermediate potential between “L” and “H”. If they are fixed to “L” or “H”, or on the intermediate potential, a sol- dering failure of that line, a shot with other line, or faulty SYS- TEM CONTROL (IC103) is doubtful. • HA [0 – 21] and HD [0 – 15] signals check Using an oscilloscope, measure the HA [0 – 21] ( – , – , , 1 – 5 pins) and HD [0 – 15] (ig – pins) of the SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) to check if they are fixed to “L” (0 V) or “H” (3.3 V), or if HA is on the intermediate potential between “L” and “H” (HD is on intermediate potential in nor- mal state), or if same waveform as that of adjacent pins is mea- sured. In case of “L” or “H”, intermediate potential, or same waveform, a soldering failure of that line, a shot with other line, or faulty SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) is doubtful. 1-2. CPUCK (33 MHz) is outputted (communication with ROM is normal) • AVD (IC503) check Using an oscilloscope, measure the SDCLKO ( pin) of the AVD (IC503) to check that 95 MHz is outputted. If not output- ted, a short of 27 MHz line across CLKI ( pin) and SCLKIN ( pin), IC mounting failure, or faulty AVD (IC503) is doubt- ful. If 27 MHz is outputted, the communication between SYS- TEM CONTROL (IC103) and AVD (IC503) is disabled, and therefore check the following items, particularly the AVD (IC503). • WAIT signal check Using an oscilloscope, measure the XWAIT (yj pin) of the SYS- TEM CONTROL (IC103) to check if it is fixed to “L” (0 V) or on the intermediate potential. In case of “L” or intermediate potential, examine CS2X – CS5X (y; – yd pins) to check if any pin is fixed to “L”. For the CS2X and CS3X, AVD (IC503) mounting failure or faulty IC is doubtful. For the CS4X and CS5X, ARP&SERVO (IC302) mounting fail- ure or faulty IC is doubtful. If CS2X – CS5X are not “L”, or they are sometimes on interme- diate potential, a soldering failure of XWAIT line, a short with other line, or faulty SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) is doubtful. • INT signal check Using an oscilloscope, measure the INT0 – 2, 4 – 6 (qh – qk pins, w; – ws pins) of the SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) to check if INT0 – 2, and 6 are fixed to “L” (0 V) and INT5 is fixed to “H” (3.3 V), or they are on intermediate potential. In case of “L”, “H”, or intermediate potential, a soldering failure of IC’s connected to that line, a short with other line, faulty SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103), or faulty each IC is doubtful. INT0 : AVD (IC503) INT1, INT2: ARP&SERVO (IC302) INT5, INT6: AUDIO DSP (IC701) • CSnX signals check Using an oscilloscope, measure the CX0X – CX7X (tk – yd, yg, yh pins) of the SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) to check if they are fixed to “L” (0 V), or two or more CS’s sometime go “L”, or on intermediate potential. In case of fixed “L”, two or more CS’s on “L” or intermediate potential, a soldering failure of IC’s connected to that line, a short with other line, faulty SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103), or faulty each IC is doubtful. CS0X : ROM (IC107 or IC108) CS2X, CS3X: AVD (IC503) CS4X, CS5X: ARP&SERVO (IC302) • Other CS signals check Using an oscilloscope, measure the VESCS/X39CS (i; pin) and XDACS (ul pin) of the SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) to check if they are fixed to “L”. If fixed, a soldering failure of that line, a short with other line, or faulty SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) is doubtful. If the above checking could not find a fault, check the outputted CS signal. If CS signal other than CS0X is outputted, a mounting failure of each IC or faulty IC that corresponds to active CS signal is doubtful. CS2X, CS3X: AVD (IC503) CS4X, CS5X: ARP&SERVO (IC302) 2. Test mode menu is displayed, but operation stops when a menu is selected Using an oscilloscope, measure the PLCKO (og pin) of the ARP& SERVO (IC302) to check if it is fixed to “L” (0 V) or “H” (3.3 V). If fixed to “L” or “H”, the ARP&SERVO (IC302) is faulty. If not fixed, check the items in 1-2. in order. www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 6-19 6-19 E 3. Specific item failed in Diag All Check A mounting failure of IC or faulty IC for that item is doubtful. If “1901NG” is displayed, a loose connection of CN801, mount- ing failure of AUDIO DSP (IC701), or faulty IC is doubtful. 4. Picture and sound are not outputted Check the CN801 for connection, and the flat cable for damage or loose connection. 5. Picture is outputted, but sound is not outputted A mounting failure of AUDIO DSP (IC801) or AUDIO DAC (IC802, IC803), power supply failure, or faulty IC is doubtful. 6. Sound is outputted, but picture is not outputted Using an oscilloscope, measure the yd, yh, yl, uf, uj, and i; pins of AVD (IC503) to check if analog signals are outputted re- spectively. If not outputted, a soldering failure of that line, a short with other line, missing capacitor or resistor, or faulty AVD is doubtful. 6-11-3. Drive Auto Adjustment stops by an error Faulty analog circuits of ARP&SERVO (IC302) or faulty periph- eral circuits of DIGITAL SERVO (IC202) on the MB-100 board, faulty optical pickup, or loose connection of flat cable is doubtful. 6-11-4. Power is Supplied but Unstable If Syscon Diagnosis completed successfully, basically the boards other than MB-100 board, connection, optical pickup, or mechani- cal deck will be faulty. 1. Red LED does not light when AC is supplied Check if the specified voltage is outputted from the EVER –11 V (3 pin), EVER +3.3 V (qa pin), and EVER +11 V (qd pin) of CN201 or CN920 in the power supply block. If not outputted, the power supply block will be faulty. Also check the following, as the set does not work normally under these conditions. 2. At [POWER] button ON, LED does not light in green even once, but kept in red (standby state) Check if the specified voltage is outputted from the EVER –11 V (3 pin), EVER +3.3 V (qa pin), and EVER +11 V (qd pin) of CN201 or CN920 in the power supply block. If not outputted, the power supply block will be faulty. Check the P-CONT (2 pin) of CN401 on the IF-83 board if it becomes “H”. If not “H”, a soldering failure of that line, a short with other line, missing capacitor or resistor, faulty AVD (IC503), loose connection between power supply block and IF-83 board, loose connection of connectors, faulty power supply block, or faulty IF-83 board is doubtful. Also check the following, as the set does not work normally under these conditions. 3. At [POWER] button ON, LED lights in green but returns to red (standby state) after several seconds (e.g. it returns to standby state after “SONY DVD” was displayed) There is no regularity between faulty parts and timing when the set returns to the standby state). Check if the specified voltage is outputted from the power supply block. If not outputted, the power supply block will be faulty. Check the XFRRST (9 pin) of CN101 on the MB-100 board if it is fixed to “L”, or the XIBUSY (0 pin), XIFCS (qa pin), SI0 (qs pin), SO0 (qd pin) and SC0 (qf pin) of CN101 if they are fixed to “L” or “H”. If fixed to “L” or “H”, a soldering failure of that line, a short with other line, missing capacitor or resistor, or faulty AVD (IC503) is doubtful. If not fixed to “L” or “H”, loose connection between power sup- ply block and IF-83 board or between IF-83 board and MB-100 board, loose connection of connectors, or faulty IF-83 board is doubtful. Also check the following, as the set does not work normally under these conditions. 4. At [POWER] button ON, LED lights in green but fluorescent display tube does not light Loose connection between power supply block and IF-83 board, loose connection of connectors, or faulty IF-83 board is doubtful. 5. Picture and sound are not outputted Loose connection between power supply block and IF-83 board or between IF-83 and AV-58 board or between AV-58 board and MB-100 board, loose connection of connectors, or faulty AV-58 board is doubtful. 6. Picture is out outputted correctly A mounting failure of BNR (IC601) on the MB-100 board, or faulty AVD (IC503) or ARP&SERVO (IC302), or faulty 27 MHz output (frequency, waveform) from 27-1OUT (3 pin) of PLL (IC102) is doubtful. 6-11-5. Power is not Supplied 1. Red LED does not light when AC is supplied The power (EVER +3.3 V) is not supplied to the IF CON (IC404) on the IF-83 board. The X401 does not oscillate. 2. At [POWER] button ON, LED is kept in red (standby state) Any button has been pressed. The voltage at PONCHK (e; pin) of the IF CON (IC404) on the IF-83 board exceeds 0.5 V. 3. At [POWER] button ON, LED lights in green but returns to red (standby state) after several seconds The PONCHK (e; pin) of the IF CON (IC404) on the IF-83 board is abnormal (slow rising from 0.5 V to more than 1.5 V, or voltage not rising to more than 1.5 V). The SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) on the MB-100 board is faulty. www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 7-1 7-1. POWER SUPPLY CHECK 1. HS13S0U Board Mode E-E Instrument Digital voltmeter EVER +3.3 V Check Test point CN201 pin qa Specification 3.5 ± 0.2 Vdc SW +3.3 V Check Test point CN201 pin 8 Specification 3.3 ± 0.2 Vdc +5 V Check Test point CN201 pin qs Specification 5.0 ± 0.3 Vdc SW +11 V Check Test point CN201 pin 6, 7 Specification 11.5 Vdc EVER +11 V Check Test point CN201 pin qd Specification 11.0 ± 1.0 Vdc EVER –11 V Check Test point CN201 pin 3 Specification –11.0 ± 1.0 Vdc Checking method: 1) Confirm that each voltage satisfies the specification. SECTION 7 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT DVP-NS700P In making adjustment, refer to 7-3. Adjustment Related Parts Arrangement. Note: During diagnostic check, the characters and color bars can be seen only with the NTSC monitor. Therefore, for diag- nostic check, use the monitor that supports both NTSC and PAL modes. This section describes procedures and instructions necessary for adjusting electrical circuits in this set. Instruments required: 1) Color monitor TV 2) Oscilloscope 1 or 2 phenomena, band width over 100 MHz, with delay mode 3) Frequency counter (over 8 digits) 4) Digital voltmeter 5) Standard commander (RMT-D129A) 6) DVD reference disc HLX-501 (J-6090-071-A) (dual layer) (NTSC) HLX-503 (J-6090-069-A) (single layer) (NTSC) HLX-504 (J-6090-088-A) (single layer) (NTSC) HLX-505 (J-6090-089-A) (dual layer) (NTSC) 7) SACD reference disc HLXA-509 (J-6090-090-A) 8) Extention Cable (J-6090-107-A) +1.0 –1.5 www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 7-2 3. Checking S Video Output S-Y Check S-terminal video output. If it is incorrect, pictures will not be displayed correctly in spite of connection to the TV with a S- terminal cable. Mode Video level adjustment in test mode Signal Color bars Test point S VIDEO OUT (S-Y) connector (75 Ω terminated) Instrument Oscilloscope Specification 1.0 ± 0.05 Vp-p Checking method: 1) In the test mode initial menu “6” Video Level Adjustment, set so that color bars are generated. 2) Confirm that the S-Y level is 1.0 ± 0.05 Vp-p. Figure 7-3 4. Checking S Video Output S-C This checks whether the S-C satisfies the NTSC/PAL Standard. If it is not correct, the colors will be too dark or light. Mode Video level adjustment in test mode Signal Color bars Test point S VIDEO OUT (S-C) connector (75 Ω terminated) Instrument Oscilloscope Specification A = 286 ± 30 mVp-p (NTSC) A = 300 ± 100 mVp-p (PAL) Checking method: 1) In the test mode initial menu “6” Video Level Adjustment, set so that color bars are generated. 2) Confirm that the S-C burst is “A”. Figure 7-4 7-2. ADJUSTMENT OF VIDEO SYSTEM 1. Video Level Adjustment (MB-100 BOARD) This adjustment is made to satisfy the NTSC/PAL standard, and if not adjusted correctly, the brightness will be too large or small. Mode Video level adjustment in test mode Signal Color bars Test point LINE OUT (VIDEO) connector (75 Ω terminated) Instrument Oscilloscope Adjusting element RV501 Specification 1.0 Vp-p Adjusting method: 1) In the test mode initial menu “6” Video Level Adjustment, set so that color bars are generated. 2) Adjust the RV501 to attain 1.0 Vp-p. Figure 7-1 2. Progressive Video Level Adjustment (MB-100 BOARD) This adjustments progressive video output. If it is incorrect, cor- rect brightness will not be attained when connected to, for instance, projector. Mode Video level adjustment in test mode Signal Color bars Test point COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y) connector (75 Ω terminated) Instrument Oscilloscope Adjusting element RV901 Specification 1.00 Vp-p Adjusting method: 1) In the test mode initial menu “7” Prog Video Level Adjust- ment, set so that color bars are generated. 2) Adjust the RV901 to attain 1.00 Vp-p Figure 7-2 +0.04 –0.02 +0.04 –0.02 1.0 Vp-p +0.04 –0.02 A + 0.04 – 0.02 + 0.04 – 0.02 1.00 Vp-p + 0.04 – 0.02 1.0 ± 0.05 Vp-p www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 7-4 E 7-3. ADJUSTMENT RELATED PARTS ARRANGEMENT MB-100 BOARD (SIDE A) HS13S0U BOARD (SIDE A) 7-3 700 ± 50 mVp-p 700 ± 50 mVp-p 5. Checking Component Video Output Y This checks component video output Y. If it is incorrect, correct brightness will not be attained when connected to, for instance, projector. Mode Video level adjustment in test mode Signal Color bars Test point COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y) connector (75 Ω terminated) Instrument Oscilloscope Specification 1.0 ± 0.05 Vp-p Checking method: 1) In the test mode initial menu “6” Video Level Adjustment, set so that color bars are generated. 2) Confirm that the Y level is 1.0 ± 0.05 Vp-p. Figure 7-5 6. Checking Component Video Output B-Y This checks component video output B-Y. If it is incorrect, cor- rect colors will not be displayed when connected to, for instance, projector. Mode Video level adjustment in test mode Signal Color bars Test point COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (PB) connector (75 Ω terminated) Instrument Oscilloscope Specification 700 ± 50 mVp-p Checking method: 1) In the test mode initial menu “6” Video Level Adjustment, set so that color bars are generated. 2) Confirm that the B-Y level is 700 ± 50 mVp-p. Figure 7-6 1.0 ± 0.05 Vp-p 7. Checking Component Video Output R-Y This checks component video output R-Y. If it is incorrect, cor- rect colors will not be displayed when connected to, for instance, projector. Mode Video level adjustment in test mode Signal Color bars Test point COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (PR) connector (75 Ω terminated) Instrument Oscilloscope Specification 700 ± 50 mVp-p Checking method: 1) In the test mode initial menu “6” Video Level Adjustment, set so that color bars are generated. 2) Confirm that the R-Y level is 700 ± 50 mVp-p. Figure 7-7 RV501 RV901 IC503 IC503 IICIIIC503 PROG VIDEO LEVEL ADJ VIDEO LEVEL ADJ 13 1 CN201 IC503 IC701 w w w . x i a o y u 1 6 3 . c o m Q Q 3 7 6 3 1 5 1 5 0 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 T E L 1 3 9 4 2 2 9 6 5 1 3 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 8-1 DVP-NS700P 8-1 NOTE: • -XX and -X mean standardized parts, so they may have some difference from the original one. • Color Indication of Appearance Parts Example: KNOB, BALANCE (WHITE) . . . (RED) ↑ ↑ Parts Color Cabinet's Color • Items marked “*” are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine service. Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items. • The mechanical parts with no reference number in the exploded views are not supplied. • Accessories and packing materials are given in the last of the electrical parts list. SECTION 8 REPAIR PARTS LIST 8-1. EXPLODED VIEWS The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number speci- fied. Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiquens pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié. Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark 8-1-1. CASE ASSEMBLY 8 3-970-608-51 SUMITITE (B3), +BV 9 1-476-714-11 ENCODER, ROTARY 10 3-068-143-01 KEY, CURSOR 11 1-476-605-21 COMMANDER, STANDARD (RMT-D129A) 12 3-068-047-11 CASE 13 3-068-142-01 RING, SHUTTLE 1 3-067-237-11 EMBLEM (V), DVD 2 3-067-236-01 COVER (P), TRAY 3 4-217-485-01 EMBLEM (5-A), SONY 4 3-059-349-11 LEG CUSHION 5 X-3951-613-1 FRONT PANEL ASSY 6 3-710-901-61 SCREW, TAPPING 7 3-068-890-01 CUSHION, REAR LEG 1 3 4 10 9 8 7 6 6 12 6 5 11 13 2 www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 8-2 8-1-2. CHASSIS ASSEMBLY Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark 63 1-757-693-11 CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMO-001) 64 1-757-694-11 CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMO-002) 65 1-757-697-11 CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMM-035) 66 4-966-267-12 BUSHING (FBS001), CORD 67 3-970-608-51 SUMITITE (B3), +BV 70 3-069-090-01 COVER, EJECT 71 1-757-800-11 CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMA-029) 72 1-757-804-11 CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMAV-003) * 73 A-6065-698-A RM-85 BOARD, COMPLETE 74 3-069-230-01 CUSHION (LED) * 51 1-468-583-11 POWER BLOCK (HS13S0U) 52 3-067-232-21 BUTTON (POWER) 53 3-059-321-11 INDICATOR (P) 54 3-067-233-11 JOINT (POWER) 55 3-970-608-11 SUMITITE (B3), +BV 056 1-757-571-11 CORD, POWER 57 3-050-569-01 SUMITITE (B3), +WHD * 59 A-6065-697-A IF-83 BOARD, COMPLETE * 60 A-6065-696-A MB-100 BOARD, COMPLETE * 61 A-6065-695-A AV-58 BOARD, COMPLETE 62 1-757-798-11 CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FIR-003) 51 73 55 52 54 53 57 55 55 65 64 63 60 72 71 61 59 67 70 62 74 67 66 55 55 56 57 Mechanism deck not supplied not supplied not supplied The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part num- ber specified. Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié. www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 8-3 8-1-3. MECHANISM DECK ASSEMBLY Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark 103 3-067-344-01 INSULATOR SCREW 0104 8-820-144-06 OPTICAL PICK-UP KHM-240AAA/J1RP 101 A-6062-514-A LOADING ASSY (M) 102 3-053-847-11 INSULATOR 101 102 102 102 103 103 104 103 not supplied not supplied not supplied not supplied not supplied not supplied not supplied not supplied not supplied not supplied not supplied not supplied The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part num- ber specified. Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié. www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 8-4 8-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number speci- fied. Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiquens pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié. When indicating parts by reference number, please include the board. NOTE: • Due to standardization, replacements in the parts list may be different from the parts speci- fied in the diagrams or the components used on the set. • -XX and -X mean standardized parts, so they may have some difference from the original one. • RESISTORS All resistors are in ohms. METAL: Metal-film resistor. METAL OXIDE: Metal oxide-film resistor. F: nonflammable • Not all of the parts for POWER BLOCK (HS13S0U) is listed. • Items marked “*” are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine service. Some delay should be anticipated when order- ing these items. • SEMICONDUCTORS In each case, u: µ, for example: uA. . : µA. . uPA. . : µPA. . uPB. . : µPB. . uPC. . : µPC. . uPD. . : µPD. . • CAPACITORS uF: µF • COILS uH: µH AV-58 * A-6065-695-A AV-58 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************** (Ref.No. 1,000 Series) < CAPACITOR > C101 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C102 1-104-660-91 ELECT 47uF 20% 16V C103 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C104 1-104-660-91 ELECT 47uF 20% 16V C105 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C106 1-104-660-91 ELECT 47uF 20% 16V C107 1-104-660-91 ELECT 47uF 20% 16V C108 1-104-660-91 ELECT 47uF 20% 16V C109 1-165-176-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.047uF 10% 16V C110 1-104-660-91 ELECT 47uF 20% 16V C111 1-104-660-91 ELECT 47uF 20% 16V C112 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C113 1-104-660-91 ELECT 47uF 20% 16V C114 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C115 1-104-660-91 ELECT 47uF 20% 16V C118 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C119 1-104-660-91 ELECT 47uF 20% 16V C120 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C121 1-104-660-91 ELECT 47uF 20% 16V C126 1-104-660-91 ELECT 47uF 20% 16V C201 1-164-739-11 CERAMIC CHIP 560PF 5% 50V C202 1-164-739-11 CERAMIC CHIP 560PF 5% 50V C203 1-164-218-11 CERAMIC CHIP 180PF 5% 50V C204 1-164-218-11 CERAMIC CHIP 180PF 5% 50V C205 1-164-218-11 CERAMIC CHIP 180PF 5% 50V C206 1-164-218-11 CERAMIC CHIP 180PF 5% 50V C207 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C208 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C209 1-126-960-11 ELECT 1uF 20% 50V C210 1-104-660-91 ELECT 47uF 20% 16V C211 1-104-660-91 ELECT 47uF 20% 16V C222 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C223 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C224 1-104-660-91 ELECT 47uF 20% 16V C227 1-104-660-91 ELECT 47uF 20% 16V C228 1-104-660-91 ELECT 47uF 20% 16V C229 1-104-660-91 ELECT 47uF 20% 16V C231 1-126-934-11 ELECT 220uF 20% 16V C242 1-126-924-11 ELECT 330uF 20% 6.3V C244 1-104-660-91 ELECT 47uF 20% 16V < CONNECTOR > CN102 1-794-473-11 CONNECTOR, FPC/FFC 9P CN202 1-506-486-11 PIN, CONNECTOR 7P CN203 1-815-461-11 CONNECTOR, FPC/FFC 25P < DIODE > D101 8-719-071-15 DIODE HZM6.8ZWA1TL D102 8-719-071-15 DIODE HZM6.8ZWA1TL D103 8-719-071-15 DIODE HZM6.8ZWA1TL D104 8-719-071-15 DIODE HZM6.8ZWA1TL D201 8-719-914-43 DIODE DAN202K-T-146 D202 8-719-914-44 DIODE DAP202K-T-146 D205 8-719-988-61 DIODE 1SS355TE-17 < IC > IC101 8-759-667-17 IC L79M05TLL-SONY-TL IC102 8-759-826-45 IC LA73050-TLM IC103 8-759-011-65 IC TC74HC4053AF (EL) IC104 8-759-684-20 IC LA7104M-TLM IC201 8-759-909-71 IC BA4558F-E2 IC203 8-759-711-59 IC NJM78L05UA-TE1 IC204 8-749-017-31 IC GP1FA550TZ (DIGITAL OUT-OPTICAL) < JACK > J101 1-815-363-11 JACK, PIN (6P) (LINE OUT) J102 1-815-361-11 JACK, PIN 3P (COMPONENT VIDEO OUT) J103 1-815-425-11 TERMINAL, S (2P) (S VIDEO OUT) J201 1-793-446-21 JACK, PIN 1P (DIGITAL OUT-COAXIAL) < JUMPER RESISTOR > JR004 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 JR006 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 JR009 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 JR012 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 JR021 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 JR022 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 JR025 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 JR026 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 JR027 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 JR028 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 8-5 Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark AV-58 JR029 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 JR030 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 JR031 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 JR032 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 JR033 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 JR034 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 JR035 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 JR036 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 JR037 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 JR038 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 JR039 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 < COIL > L101 1-412-064-11 INDUCTOR 100uH < TRANSISTOR > Q101 8-729-216-22 TRANSISTOR 2SA1162-YG-TE85L Q102 8-729-216-22 TRANSISTOR 2SA1162-YG-TE85L Q103 8-729-216-22 TRANSISTOR 2SA1162-YG-TE85L Q104 8-729-421-19 TRANSISTOR UN2213-TX Q105 8-729-424-08 TRANSISTOR UN2111-TX Q106 8-729-424-18 TRANSISTOR UN2113-TX Q107 8-729-421-19 TRANSISTOR UN2213-TX Q201 8-729-049-31 TRANSISTOR 2SB710A-RTX Q202 8-729-421-19 TRANSISTOR UN2213-TX Q203 8-729-230-49 TRANSISTOR 2SC2712-YG-TE85L Q204 8-729-027-53 TRANSISTOR DTC124TKA-T146 Q205 8-729-424-02 TRANSISTOR 2SB709A-QRS-TX Q207 8-729-046-97 TRANSISTOR 2SD1938 (F)-T (TX).SO Q208 8-729-046-97 TRANSISTOR 2SD1938 (F)-T (TX).SO Q211 8-729-230-49 TRANSISTOR 2SC2712-YG-TE85L Q216 8-729-424-02 TRANSISTOR 2SB709A-QRS-TX < RESISTOR > R101 1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/10W R102 1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/10W R103 1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/10W R104 1-216-049-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/10W R105 1-216-049-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/10W R106 1-216-049-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/10W R107 1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/10W R108 1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/10W R109 1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/10W R111 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R112 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R113 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R114 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R115 1-216-061-91 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/10W R121 1-216-061-91 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/10W R126 1-216-022-00 METAL CHIP 75 5% 1/10W R127 1-216-022-00 METAL CHIP 75 5% 1/10W R128 1-216-022-00 METAL CHIP 75 5% 1/10W R129 1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/10W R130 1-216-021-00 METAL CHIP 68 5% 1/10W R131 1-216-021-00 METAL CHIP 68 5% 1/10W R133 1-216-021-00 METAL CHIP 68 5% 1/10W R134 1-216-021-00 METAL CHIP 68 5% 1/10W R135 1-216-089-91 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/10W R139 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R140 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R141 1-216-089-91 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/10W R153 1-216-089-91 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/10W R154 1-216-081-00 METAL CHIP 22K 5% 1/10W R155 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R156 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R157 1-216-049-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/10W R158 1-216-049-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/10W R159 1-216-049-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/10W R160 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R162 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R163 1-216-032-00 METAL CHIP 200 5% 1/10W R164 1-216-032-00 METAL CHIP 200 5% 1/10W R165 1-216-032-00 METAL CHIP 200 5% 1/10W R166 1-216-033-00 METAL CHIP 220 5% 1/10W R167 1-216-033-00 METAL CHIP 220 5% 1/10W R168 1-216-033-00 METAL CHIP 220 5% 1/10W R169 1-216-021-00 METAL CHIP 68 5% 1/10W R170 1-216-021-00 METAL CHIP 68 5% 1/10W R171 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R172 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R201 1-208-798-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 0.5% 1/10W R202 1-208-798-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 0.5% 1/10W R203 1-208-798-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 0.5% 1/10W R204 1-208-798-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 0.5% 1/10W R205 1-208-800-11 METAL CHIP 5.6K 0.5% 1/10W R206 1-208-800-11 METAL CHIP 5.6K 0.5% 1/10W R207 1-216-057-00 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/10W R208 1-216-057-00 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/10W R209 1-216-057-00 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/10W R210 1-216-057-00 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/10W R211 1-208-800-11 METAL CHIP 5.6K 0.5% 1/10W R212 1-208-800-11 METAL CHIP 5.6K 0.5% 1/10W R213 1-216-065-91 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/10W R216 1-216-067-00 METAL CHIP 5.6K 5% 1/10W R217 1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/10W R218 1-216-097-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/10W R219 1-216-105-91 RES-CHIP 220K 5% 1/10W R220 1-216-041-00 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/10W R221 1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/10W R222 1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/10W R224 1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/10W R225 1-216-089-91 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/10W R226 1-216-041-00 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/10W R227 1-216-041-00 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/10W R228 1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/10W R229 1-216-089-91 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/10W R230 1-216-089-91 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/10W R234 1-216-065-91 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/10W R235 1-216-065-91 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/10W R238 1-216-097-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/10W R240 1-216-041-00 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/10W R241 1-216-041-00 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/10W R242 1-216-041-00 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/10W R243 1-216-041-00 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/10W R249 1-216-033-00 METAL CHIP 220 5% 1/10W R251 1-216-021-00 METAL CHIP 68 5% 1/10W R252 1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/10W R253 1-216-049-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/10W R254 1-216-049-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/10W www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 8-6 Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark AV-58 IF-83 R256 1-216-049-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/10W R279 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R280 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R282 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 < SWITCH > S101 1-692-989-11 SWITCH, SLIDE (SCAN SELECT) * A-6065-697-A IF-83 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************* (Ref.No. 1,000 Series) 3-067-239-01 HOLDER, FL < BUZZER > BZ401 1-529-986-11 BUZZER, VOLTAGE < CAPACITOR > C401 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C407 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C409 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C411 1-126-933-11 ELECT 100uF 20% 16V C412 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C414 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C416 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C417 1-162-968-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0047uF 5% 50V C419 1-104-666-11 ELECT 220uF 20% 25V C420 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C421 1-162-964-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V C422 1-115-339-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 50V C423 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C425 1-128-131-11 ELECT 22uF 20% 50V C426 1-124-234-00 ELECT 22uF 20% 16V C427 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C428 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C429 1-126-933-11 ELECT 100uF 20% 16V C430 1-164-392-11 CERAMIC CHIP 390PF 5% 50V C431 1-115-339-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 50V C432 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C436 1-164-392-11 CERAMIC CHIP 390PF 5% 50V C437 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C438 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C439 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V < CONNECTOR > CN401 1-778-317-11 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 13P CN402 1-785-694-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 7P CN403 1-815-458-21 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 15P * CN405 1-785-530-11 PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) 10P CN406 1-815-381-11 CONNECTOR, FPC/FFC 5P < DIODE > D403 8-719-041-97 DIODE MA113- (TX) D404 8-719-041-97 DIODE MA113- (TX) D405 8-719-041-97 DIODE MA113- (TX) D406 8-719-041-97 DIODE MA113- (TX) D408 8-719-071-15 DIODE HZM6.8ZWA1TL D409 8-719-071-15 DIODE HZM6.8ZWA1TL D412 8-719-422-62 DIODE MA8062-L-TX D414 8-719-056-06 DIODE SLR-342DCT32 (BNR) D415 8-719-056-06 DIODE SLR-342DCT32 (SURROUND) < FERRITE BEAD > FB401 1-469-324-21 FERRITE 0uH < IC > IC403 8-759-832-05 IC BA18BC0FP-E2 IC404 6-800-321-01 IC TMP86CK74F-3CB8 IC405 8-759-684-35 IC S-80830ANUP-EDT-T2 < JUMPER RESISTOR > JR402 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 JR403 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 < COIL > L401 1-408-978-21 INDUCTOR 47uH < FLUORESCENT INDICATOR > ND401 1-517-972-11 INDICATOR TUBE, FLUORESCENT < IC LINK > 0PS401 1-576-509-21 RINK, IC (1.0A) 0PS402 1-576-509-21 RINK, IC (1.0A) < TRANSISTOR > Q401 8-729-056-46 TRANSISTOR 2SC5053T100Q Q402 8-729-056-46 TRANSISTOR 2SC5053T100Q Q404 8-729-048-28 TRANSISTOR 2SD1766-T100-QR Q405 8-729-424-08 TRANSISTOR UN2111-TX < RESISTOR > R401 1-216-065-91 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/10W R402 1-216-097-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/10W R413 1-216-067-00 METAL CHIP 5.6K 5% 1/10W R414 1-216-059-00 METAL CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/10W R415 1-216-055-00 METAL CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/10W R416 1-216-055-00 METAL CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/10W R418 1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/10W R420 1-216-025-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/10W R421 1-216-059-00 METAL CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/10W R422 1-216-071-00 METAL CHIP 8.2K 5% 1/10W R423 1-216-081-00 METAL CHIP 22K 5% 1/10W R424 1-216-013-00 METAL CHIP 33 5% 1/10W R425 1-216-025-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/10W R427 1-216-063-91 RES-CHIP 3.9K 5% 1/10W R428 1-216-071-00 METAL CHIP 8.2K 5% 1/10W R429 1-216-067-00 METAL CHIP 5.6K 5% 1/10W R430 1-216-059-00 METAL CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/10W R431 1-216-063-91 RES-CHIP 3.9K 5% 1/10W R433 1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/10W R434 1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/10W R435 1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/10W R437 1-216-027-00 METAL CHIP 120 5% 1/10W R440 1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/10W The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part num- ber specified. Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié. www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 8-7 Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark IF-83 MB-100 R444 1-216-025-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/10W R446 1-216-097-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/10W R448 1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/10W R449 1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/10W R450 1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/10W R455 1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/10W R471 1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/10W R473 1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/10W R474 1-216-025-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/10W R481 1-216-025-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/10W R482 1-216-025-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/10W R483 1-216-025-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/10W R484 1-216-025-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/10W R485 1-216-025-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/10W R486 1-216-033-00 METAL CHIP 220 5% 1/10W R487 1-216-027-00 METAL CHIP 120 5% 1/10W R490 1-216-081-00 METAL CHIP 22K 5% 1/10W R491 1-216-017-91 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/10W R492 1-216-025-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/10W R493 1-216-025-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/10W R494 1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/10W R495 1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/10W < SWITCH > S401 1-771-574-21 SWITCH, TACTILE (BNR) S402 1-771-574-21 SWITCH, TACTILE (TITLE) S403 1-771-574-21 SWITCH, TACTILE (>) S404 1-771-574-21 SWITCH, TACTILE (SURROUND) S405 1-771-574-21 SWITCH, TACTILE (O RETURN) S406 1-771-574-21 SWITCH, TACTILE (x) S407 1-771-574-21 SWITCH, TACTILE (DVD MENU) S408 1-771-574-21 SWITCH, TACTILE (X) S409 1-771-574-21 SWITCH, TACTILE (DISPLAY) S410 1-771-574-21 SWITCH, TACTILE (.) S411 1-771-574-21 SWITCH, TACTILE (H) S412 1-771-574-21 SWITCH, TACTILE (A) < TRANSFORMER > T401 1-435-947-11 TRANSFORMER, DC-DC CONVERT < VIBRATOR > X401 1-781-472-21 VIBRATOR, CERAMIC (8MHz) * A-6065-696-A MB-100 BOARD, COMPLETE *********************** (Ref.No. 2,000 Series) < CAPACITOR > C001 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C002 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C003 1-126-205-11 ELECT CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V C004 1-126-205-11 ELECT CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V C005 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C006 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C007 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C008 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C009 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C010 1-162-964-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V C011 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C012 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C013 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C014 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C015 1-126-205-11 ELECT CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V C016 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C018 1-126-205-11 ELECT CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V C020 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C021 1-126-205-11 ELECT CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V C022 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C023 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C025 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C026 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C027 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C103 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C104 1-126-209-11 ELECT CHIP 100uF 20% 4V C105 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C106 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C107 1-162-917-11 CERAMIC CHIP 15PF 5% 50V C108 1-162-918-11 CERAMIC CHIP 18PF 5% 50V C109 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C110 1-126-209-11 ELECT CHIP 100uF 20% 4V C111 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C112 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C113 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C114 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C115 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C116 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C118 1-126-607-11 ELECT CHIP 47uF 20% 4V C121 1-126-206-11 ELECT CHIP 100uF 20% 6.3V C122 1-126-204-11 ELECT CHIP 47uF 20% 16V C123 1-126-246-11 ELECT CHIP 220uF 20% 4V C124 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C201 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C202 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C205 1-162-966-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 50V C206 1-162-966-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 50V C207 1-162-966-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 50V C208 1-162-966-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 50V C209 1-124-779-00 ELECT CHIP 10uF 20% 16V C215 1-162-968-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0047uF 10% 50V C216 1-162-968-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0047uF 10% 50V C217 1-126-205-11 ELECT CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V C218 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C219 1-164-739-11 CERAMIC CHIP 560PF 5% 50V C221 1-124-779-00 ELECT CHIP 10uF 20% 16V C222 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C223 1-126-205-11 ELECT CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V C224 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C225 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C226 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C227 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C228 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C231 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C232 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C233 1-162-964-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V C234 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C235 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C236 1-165-176-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.047uF 10% 16V C238 1-165-176-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.047uF 10% 16V C239 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 8-8 Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark MB-100 C240 1-164-217-11 CERAMIC CHIP 150PF 5% 50V C243 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C244 1-124-779-00 ELECT CHIP 10uF 20% 16V C246 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C247 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C248 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C304 1-126-206-11 ELECT CHIP 100uF 20% 6.3V C305 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C306 1-162-968-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0047uF 10% 50V C307 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C309 1-162-968-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0047uF 10% 50V C310 1-162-968-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0047uF 10% 50V C311 1-162-968-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0047uF 10% 50V C312 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C313 1-164-677-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.033uF 10% 16V C315 1-162-927-11 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF 5% 50V C317 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C318 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C319 1-110-563-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.068uF 10% 16V C320 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C321 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C322 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C323 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C324 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C325 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C326 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C327 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C328 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C331 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C332 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C333 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C334 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C335 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C336 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C337 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C338 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C339 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C340 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C341 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C342 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C343 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C344 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C346 1-162-968-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0047uF 10% 50V C347 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C348 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C349 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C350 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C351 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C401 1-164-245-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.015uF 10% 25V C402 1-164-230-11 CERAMIC CHIP 220PF 5% 50V C403 1-162-927-11 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF 5% 50V C404 1-162-965-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0015uF 10% 50V C405 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C406 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C407 1-164-230-11 CERAMIC CHIP 220PF 5% 50V C408 1-162-927-11 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF 5% 50V C409 1-162-964-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V C410 1-162-964-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V C411 1-162-968-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0047uF 10% 50V C412 1-164-677-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.033uF 10% 16V C413 1-164-677-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.033uF 10% 16V C414 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C415 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C416 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C417 1-162-964-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V C418 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C419 1-126-204-11 ELECT CHIP 47uF 20% 16V C420 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C421 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C427 1-162-964-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V C428 1-162-964-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V C501 1-126-193-11 ELECT 1uF 20% 50V C502 1-124-779-00 ELECT CHIP 10uF 20% 16V C503 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C504 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C505 1-124-779-00 ELECT CHIP 10uF 20% 16V C506 1-124-779-00 ELECT CHIP 10uF 20% 16V C508 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C509 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C510 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C512 1-126-246-11 ELECT CHIP 220uF 20% 4V C513 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C514 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C516 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C518 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C519 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C520 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C521 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C522 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C523 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C524 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C525 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C526 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C528 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C529 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C530 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C531 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C532 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C533 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C534 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C535 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C536 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C537 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C538 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C539 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C540 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C541 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C542 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C544 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C545 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C546 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C547 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C601 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C602 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C603 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C604 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C802 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C807 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C810 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C811 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 8-9 Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark C812 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C813 1-127-715-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.22uF 10% 16V C816 1-124-779-00 ELECT CHIP 10uF 20% 16V C901 1-126-205-11 ELECT CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V C902 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C903 1-126-205-11 ELECT CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V C904 1-126-205-11 ELECT CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V C905 1-162-964-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V C906 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C907 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C908 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C909 1-126-205-11 ELECT CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V C910 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C911 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C912 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C913 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C914 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C915 1-162-964-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V C916 1-127-956-21 FILM CHIP 0.1uF 5% 16V C917 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C919 1-164-315-11 CERAMIC CHIP 470PF 5% 50V C920 1-164-315-11 CERAMIC CHIP 470PF 5% 50V C921 1-126-205-11 ELECT CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V C922 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C923 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C924 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C926 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C927 1-162-923-11 CERAMIC CHIP 47PF 5% 50V C928 1-162-923-11 CERAMIC CHIP 47PF 5% 50V C929 1-162-923-11 CERAMIC CHIP 47PF 5% 50V C930 1-162-923-11 CERAMIC CHIP 47PF 5% 50V C931 1-162-923-11 CERAMIC CHIP 47PF 5% 50V C932 1-162-923-11 CERAMIC CHIP 47PF 5% 50V C933 1-162-923-11 CERAMIC CHIP 47PF 5% 50V C934 1-162-923-11 CERAMIC CHIP 47PF 5% 50V C935 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C936 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V < CONNECTOR > CN101 1-815-459-21 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 15P * CN103 1-770-470-21 PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) 6P CN201 1-815-507-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 26P CN202 1-779-935-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 9P CN402 1-779-353-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 5P CN801 1-815-396-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 25P CN902 1-779-935-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 9P < FERRITE BEAD > FB102 1-469-324-21 FERRITE 0uH FB103 1-469-324-21 FERRITE 0uH FB104 1-469-324-21 FERRITE 0uH FB105 1-469-324-21 FERRITE 0uH FB106 1-469-324-21 FERRITE 0uH FB107 1-469-324-21 FERRITE 0uH FB108 1-469-324-21 FERRITE 0uH FB109 1-469-784-11 FERRITE 0uH FB110 1-469-324-21 FERRITE 0uH < FILTER > FL101 1-234-177-21 FILTER, CHIP EMI FL102 1-234-177-21 FILTER, CHIP EMI FL103 1-234-177-21 FILTER, CHIP EMI FL104 1-233-893-21 FILTER, CHIP EMI FL105 1-234-177-21 FILTER, CHIP EMI FL106 1-234-177-21 FILTER, CHIP EMI FL108 1-234-177-21 FILTER, CHIP EMI FL201 1-234-177-21 FILTER, CHIP EMI FL501 1-234-177-21 FILTER, CHIP EMI FL502 1-234-177-21 FILTER, CHIP EMI FL505 1-234-177-21 FILTER, CHIP EMI < IC > IC001 8-759-837-36 IC CXD9606Q IC002 8-759-271-88 IC TC7SHU04FU-TE85R IC003 8-759-683-76 IC K4S161622D-TC80T IC004 8-759-271-88 IC TC7SHU04FU-TE85R IC101 8-759-641-86 IC BR24C16F-E2 IC102 8-759-831-81 IC IMIC6001BTD IC103 8-759-829-75 IC MB91307APFV-G-BND-E1 IC107 Note IC108 Note IC202 8-759-828-02 IC SP3728AC IC301 8-759-832-31 IC TK71533ASCL IC302 8-759-828-01 IC CXD9635R IC303 8-759-643-10 IC GM71V18160CT-6TR IC401 8-759-826-42 IC FAN8034 IC501 8-759-832-30 IC TK71518ASCL IC502 8-759-599-45 IC MM1385ENLE IC503 8-752-409-87 IC CXD1933Q IC504 8-759-683-76 IC K4S161622D-TC80T IC505 8-759-683-76 IC K4S161622D-TC80T IC601 8-759-826-44 IC CXD9632Q IC801 8-759-825-34 IC CXD9626Q IC802 8-759-825-32 IC CXD9627N-E2 IC901 8-759-837-11 IC CXD9649R IC902 6-700-253-01 IC ADV7199KS IC903 8-759-599-45 IC MM1385ENLE < COIL > L201 1-412-031-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 47uH L202 1-412-031-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 47uH < TRANSISTOR > Q201 8-729-903-46 TRANSISTOR 2SB1132-T100-QR Q202 8-729-903-46 TRANSISTOR 2SB1132-T100-QR Q901 8-729-230-49 TRANSISTOR 2SC2712-YG-TE85L Q902 8-729-230-49 TRANSISTOR 2SC2712-YG-TE85L Q903 8-729-230-49 TRANSISTOR 2SC2712-YG-TE85L Q904 8-729-216-22 TRANSISTOR 2SA1162-YG-TE85L Q905 8-729-216-22 TRANSISTOR 2SA1162-YG-TE85L Q906 8-729-216-22 TRANSISTOR 2SA1162-YG-TE85L Q907 8-729-230-49 TRANSISTOR 2SC2712-YG-TE85L < RESISTOR > R001 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W MB-100 Note: Part number has not been determined yet. It will be noticed later. www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 8-10 Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark R002 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R003 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R004 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R005 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R006 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R007 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R008 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R009 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R010 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R011 1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R012 1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R013 1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R014 1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R015 1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R016 1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R017 1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R018 1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R020 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R021 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R022 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R023 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R024 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R025 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R026 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R027 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R028 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R029 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R030 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R031 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R032 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R033 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R034 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R035 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R036 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R037 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R038 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R039 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R040 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R041 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R042 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R043 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R044 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R045 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R046 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R047 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R048 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R049 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R050 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R051 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R052 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R053 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R054 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R055 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R056 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R057 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R058 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R059 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R060 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R061 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R062 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R063 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R064 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R065 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R066 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R067 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R068 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R069 1-216-789-11 METAL CHIP 2.2 5% 1/16W R070 1-216-789-11 METAL CHIP 2.2 5% 1/16W R071 1-216-789-11 METAL CHIP 2.2 5% 1/16W R072 1-216-828-11 METAL CHIP 3.9K 5% 1/16W R073 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R074 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R075 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R076 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R101 1-216-789-11 METAL CHIP 2.2 5% 1/16W R106 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R107 1-216-820-11 METAL CHIP 820 5% 1/16W R109 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R111 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/16W R112 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R113 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R114 1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R116 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R117 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R118 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R119 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R121 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R123 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R124 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R125 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R126 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R127 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R128 1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W R129 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R130 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R133 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R134 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R135 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R136 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R137 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R138 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R141 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R142 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R143 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R145 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R146 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R148 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R151 1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W R152 1-216-081-00 METAL CHIP 22K 5% 1/10W R153 1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W R155 1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W R156 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R160 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R161 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R162 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R163 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R164 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R165 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R166 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/16W R167 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 MB-100 www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 8-11 Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark R168 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R170 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R177 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R178 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R182 1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R199 1-216-826-11 METAL CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W R201 1-216-815-11 METAL CHIP 330 5% 1/16W R202 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R203 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R204 1-216-837-11 METAL CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R205 1-216-845-11 METAL CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R206 1-216-838-11 METAL CHIP 27K 5% 1/16W R207 1-216-803-11 METAL CHIP 33 5% 1/16W R208 1-216-803-11 METAL CHIP 33 5% 1/16W R209 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R210 1-216-841-11 METAL CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R211 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R212 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R215 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R216 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R219 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R220 1-216-803-11 METAL CHIP 33 5% 1/16W R223 1-216-803-11 METAL CHIP 33 5% 1/16W R224 1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R225 1-216-841-11 METAL CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R229 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R237 1-216-834-11 METAL CHIP 12K 5% 1/16W R238 1-216-861-11 METAL CHIP 2.2M 5% 1/16W R245 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R246 1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W R299 1-216-847-11 METAL CHIP 150K 5% 1/16W R301 1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W R302 1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W R305 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R306 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R307 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R308 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R309 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R310 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R311 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R312 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R313 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/16W R314 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/16W R315 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/16W R316 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R317 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R318 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R319 1-216-831-11 METAL CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W R320 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R321 1-216-817-11 METAL CHIP 470 5% 1/16W R328 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R329 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R330 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R334 1-218-871-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16W R335 1-218-855-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 0.5% 1/16W R336 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R337 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R338 1-218-879-11 METAL CHIP 22K 0.5% 1/16W R341 1-218-871-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16W R342 1-218-883-11 METAL CHIP 33K 0.5% 1/16W R343 1-218-831-11 METAL CHIP 220 0.5% 1/16W R344 1-218-847-11 METAL CHIP 1K 0.5% 1/16W R345 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R349 1-216-838-11 METAL CHIP 27K 5% 1/16W R350 1-216-822-11 METAL CHIP 1.2K 5% 1/16W R351 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R352 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R356 1-218-853-11 METAL CHIP 1.8K 0.5% 1/16W R368 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R384 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R385 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R402 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R403 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R404 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R405 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R406 1-216-846-11 METAL CHIP 120K 5% 1/16W R407 1-216-846-11 METAL CHIP 120K 5% 1/16W R408 1-216-847-11 METAL CHIP 150K 5% 1/16W R409 1-216-847-11 METAL CHIP 150K 5% 1/16W R410 1-216-842-11 METAL CHIP 56K 5% 1/16W R411 1-216-842-11 METAL CHIP 56K 5% 1/16W R412 1-216-850-11 METAL CHIP 270K 5% 1/16W R413 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R414 1-216-853-11 METAL CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W R415 1-216-846-11 METAL CHIP 120K 5% 1/16W R416 1-216-855-11 METAL CHIP 680K 5% 1/16W R417 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R418 1-216-839-11 METAL CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R419 1-216-839-11 METAL CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R420 1-216-853-11 METAL CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W R421 1-216-839-11 METAL CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R422 1-216-839-11 METAL CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R423 1-216-839-11 METAL CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R424 1-216-839-11 METAL CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R425 1-216-849-11 METAL CHIP 220K 5% 1/16W R426 1-216-853-11 METAL CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W R427 1-218-895-11 METAL CHIP 100K 0.5% 1/16W R428 1-216-839-11 METAL CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R429 1-218-889-11 METAL CHIP 56K 0.5% 1/16W R430 1-218-895-11 METAL CHIP 100K 0.5% 1/16W R431 1-218-889-11 METAL CHIP 56K 0.5% 1/16W R432 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R433 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R434 1-216-815-11 METAL CHIP 330 5% 1/16W R435 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R436 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R439 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R507 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R510 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R511 1-218-831-11 METAL CHIP 220 0.5% 1/16W R512 1-218-831-11 METAL CHIP 220 0.5% 1/16W R513 1-218-831-11 METAL CHIP 220 0.5% 1/16W R514 1-218-831-11 METAL CHIP 220 0.5% 1/16W R515 1-218-831-11 METAL CHIP 220 0.5% 1/16W R516 1-218-831-11 METAL CHIP 220 0.5% 1/16W R517 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R518 1-216-822-11 METAL CHIP 1.2K 5% 1/16W R519 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R521 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R522 1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W MB-100 www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 8-12 Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark R524 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R525 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R533 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R548 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R549 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R554 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R604 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R803 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R804 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R805 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R807 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R901 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R902 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R903 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R904 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R905 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R907 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R908 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R909 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R910 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R911 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R912 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R913 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R914 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R915 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R916 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R917 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R918 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R919 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R920 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R921 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R922 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R923 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R924 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R925 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R926 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R927 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R928 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R929 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R930 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R931 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R932 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R933 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R934 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R935 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R936 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R937 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R938 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R939 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R940 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R941 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R942 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R943 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R944 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R946 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R947 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R948 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R951 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R952 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R953 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R954 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R955 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R956 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R957 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R958 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R959 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R960 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R961 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R962 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R963 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R964 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R965 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R966 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R968 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R969 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R971 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R972 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R973 1-216-825-11 METAL CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R975 1-216-789-11 METAL CHIP 2.2 5% 1/16W R976 1-218-834-11 METAL CHIP 300 0.5% 1/16W R977 1-218-834-11 METAL CHIP 300 0.5% 1/16W R978 1-218-834-11 METAL CHIP 300 0.5% 1/16W R979 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R980 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R981 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R983 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R984 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R985 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R986 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R987 1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R988 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R989 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 < VARIABLE RESISTOR > RV501 1-223-583-11 RES, ADJ, CARBON 1K (VIDEO LEVEL ADJ) RV901 1-223-582-11 RES, ADJ, CARBON 470 (PROG VIDEO LEVEL ADJ) < VIBRATOR > X001 1-795-251-21 VIBRATOR, CERAMIC (66MHz) X101 1-795-174-11 VIBRATOR, CERAMIC (16.5MHz) X102 1-781-950-11 VIBRATOR, CRYSTAL (27MHz) \ MS-81 BOARD ************ (Ref.No. 1,000 Series) < CONNECTOR > CN001 1-815-412-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 5P < SWITCH > S001 1-786-133-11 SWITCH, ROTARY (CHUCK/TRAY DETECT) MB-100 MS-81 www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 8-13 Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark POWER BLOCK RM-85 * 1-468-583-11 POWER BLOCK (HS13S0U) ********************* (Ref. No. 5,000 Series) < CAPACITOR > 0C101 1-115-165-11 FILM 0.1uF 250V 0C107 1-113-937-11 CERAMIC 2200PF 250V C110 9-885-012-85 ELECT 120uF 200V C115 1-130-489-11 FILM 0.033uF 50V C116 1-130-483-11 FILM 0.01uF 50V C117 1-130-477-11 FILM 0.0033uF 50V C150 9-885-012-86 CERAMIC 470PF 1KV C211 1-111-083-11 ELECT 150uF 35V C213 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 35V C221 1-111-082-11 ELECT 100uF 35V C223 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 35V C301 1-126-961-11 ELECT 2.2uF 50V C311 1-111-087-11 ELECT 330uF 35V C313 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 35V C314 1-126-965-11 ELECT 22uF 50V C413 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 35V C414 1-130-483-11 FILM 0.01uF 50V C511 1-111-082-11 ELECT 100uF 35V C513 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 35V C611 1-111-087-11 ELECT 330uF 35V C613 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 35V C711 1-126-947-11 ELECT 47uF 35V < CONNECTOR > 0CN101 1-580-230-11 CONNECTOR 2P * CN201 1-778-318-21 CONNECTOR 13P < DIODE > 0D101 9-885-000-79 DIODE S1WBA60 D104 8-719-062-66 DIODE HZS2C3-TE D105 9-903-904-01 DIODE 1SS270A D211 8-719-018-83 DIODE D2S4M D212 8-719-160-87 DIODE RD33FB2 D221 8-719-510-02 DIODE D1NS4 D311 8-719-510-02 DIODE D1NS4 D413 9-998-285-01 DIODE D1N60 D511 8-719-510-02 DIODE D1NS4 D611 8-719-510-02 DIODE D1NS4 D621 8-719-064-11 DIODE SPR-325MVW (ON/STANDBY) < FUSE > 0F101 1-533-296-11 FUSE (2A/125V) < FUSE CLIP > FC1 9-885-012-77 FUSE CLIP FC2 9-885-012-77 FUSE CLIP < EARTH TERMINAL > FG101 1-537-738-21 TERMINAL, EARTH FG201 1-537-738-21 TERMINAL, EARTH The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part num- ber specified. Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié. < IC > IC301 8-759-420-19 IC AN1431T IC411 8-759-420-19 IC AN1431T < COIL > 0L101 9-885-012-78 LINE FILTER 18mH L150 9-885-012-79 BEAD CORE 120 L211 9-885-012-80 COIL, CHOKE 39uH L221 9-885-012-81 COIL, CHOKE 100uH L311 9-885-012-80 COIL, CHOKE 39uH L511 9-885-012-81 COIL, CHOKE 100uH L611 9-885-012-80 COIL, CHOKE 39uH 0P311 9-885-012-82 LINK, IC (1A/60V) 0P611 9-885-012-82 LINK, IC (1A/60V) < PHOTO COUPLER > 0PC101 9-995-566-01 PHOTO COUPLER PS2501 < TRANSISTOR > Q101 9-885-006-10 TRANSISTOR 2SK2750 Q102 8-729-023-98 TRANSISTOR 2SC3377 Q211 9-885-005-96 TRANSISTOR 2SJ525 Q311 9-885-006-08 TRANSISTOR 2SD1768S Q411 9-885-006-08 TRANSISTOR 2SD1768S Q611 9-885-006-08 TRANSISTOR 2SD1768S Q621 8-729-901-41 TRANSISTOR 2SC1740S Q622 8-729-029-92 TRANSISTOR DTC143ES Q712 8-729-029-92 TRANSISTOR DTC143ES < SWITCH > 0SW101 9-885-012-83 SWITCH (POWER) < TRANSFORMER > 0T101 9-885-012-87 TRANSFORMER * A-6065-698-A RM-85 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************** (Ref.No. 1,000 Series) < CAPACITOR > C501 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C502 1-104-660-91 ELECT 47uF 20% 16V < CONNECTOR > CN501 1-815-381-11 CONNECTOR, FPC/FFC 5P < DIODE > D501 8-719-056-06 DIODE SLR-342DCT32 (PROGRESSIVE) < IC > IC501 8-749-019-11 IC GP1UD28SYK www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com 8-14 Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark 8-14 E The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part num- ber specified. Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié. < RESISTOR > R501 1-216-097-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/10W R502 1-216-017-91 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/10W R503 1-216-033-00 METAL CHIP 220 5% 1/10W MISCELLANEOUS ************** 9 1-476-714-11 ENCODER, ROTARY 056 1-757-571-11 CORD, POWER 62 1-757-798-11 CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FIR-003) 63 1-757-693-11 CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMO-001) 64 1-757-694-11 CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMO-002) 65 1-757-697-11 CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMM-035) 71 1-757-800-11 CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMA-029) 72 1-757-804-11 CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMAV-003) 0104 8-820-144-06 OPTICAL PICK-UP KHM-240AAA/J1RP ACCESSORIES & PACKING MATERIALS ******************************* 1-476-605-21 COMMANDER, STANDARD (RMT-D129A) 1-751-271-12 CORD, CONNECTION (STEREO AV CABLE 1.5m) 3-068-059-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH) 3-068-059-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH, FRENCH) (Canadian) RM-85 www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com – 146 – DVP-NS700P Sony Corporation Home Video Company 9-921-799-11 2001D0500-1 © 2001. 4 Published by Quality Assurance Dept. www. xiaoyu163. com QQ 376315150 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 TEL 13942296513 9 9 2 8 9 4 2 9 8 0 5 1 5 1 3 6 7 3 Q Q TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 TEL 13942296513 QQ 376315150 892498299 http://www.xiaoyu163.com